Canon PIXMA MP830 User Manual

Office All-in-One  
User’s Guide  
QT5-0241-V03  
ENG  
Getting Help from Canon  
Help Us Help You Better  
Before you contact Canon, please record the following information.  
Serial Number (located on the inside of the product): ____________________  
Model Number (located on the front of the product): _____________________  
Setup CD-ROM number (located on the CD-ROM): _____________________  
Purchase Date:__________________________________________________  
Customer Technical Support Sequence*  
1.Internet — www.canontechsupport.com  
For quick and comprehensive self-help in an intuitively guided interactive troubleshooting  
environment, the place to start is our helpful tech support web site. In addition, the latest  
driver downloads, answers to frequently asked questions, product information, and  
“where to buy” instructions are found here.  
2.Email Tech Support — www.canontechsupport.com  
For individual attention to a special issue, try emailing our friendly technical support repre-  
sentatives, specially trained to communicate quick, easy, and logical solutions to your  
inquiries within 24 hours.  
3.Toll-Free Live Tech Support — (1-800-828-4040)  
This option provides live telephone technical support, free of service charges, Monday-  
Saturday (excluding holidays), during your product’s 1 year limited warranty period. Tele-  
phone Device for the Deaf (TDD) support is available at (1-866-251-3752).  
4.Extended Service and Support — www.canonesp.com  
Canon CarePAK Extended Service Plan is a cost-attractive and easy-to-use extended  
service program that provides up to three full years of service and support coverage at a  
very attractive price. CarePAK offers toll-free Canon technical support and includes  
Canon’s superb InstantExchange product replacement program. For further information  
about extending your Canon service and support, call (1-800-385-2155), or visit our Web  
site at www.canonesp.com. CarePAK must be purchased during your product’s war-  
ranty period.  
For more information and updated program specifics, please visit our web site at  
www.canontechsupport.com.  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
Table of Contents  
Copyright ........................................................3  
Disclaimer.......................................................3  
Model Name ...................................................4  
Trademarks.....................................................4  
How to Use the Documentation Provided.........4  
Safety Precautions ...........................................5  
Reading the Document...................................10  
Symbols Used in This Guide ........................10  
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and  
Use of Images ................................................11  
8
9
Reading from and Writing to a Memory  
Card ...................................................... 133  
Setting up the Card Slot as the Memory  
Card Drive of the Computer........................133  
Changing the Machine Settings......... 134  
The Print Settings.......................................135  
Fax Settings................................................136  
Other Settings.............................................140  
Language selection ....................................141  
Reset setting...............................................141  
Save settings..............................................141  
Load settings ..............................................141  
1
Before Printing .......................................12  
Main Components and Their Functions........12  
Turning the Machine ON and OFF ...............18  
Loading Documents to Copy, Fax, or Scan..19  
Loading Paper ..............................................22  
Changing the Print Settings..........................37  
10 Routine Maintenance .......................... 142  
Replacing an Ink Tank................................142  
Getting the Ink Level Information................142  
Knowing When to Replace Ink Tank ..........143  
Replacing Ink Tanks...................................143  
Keeping the Best Printing Results..............147  
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors  
2
3
4
Copying...................................................42  
Making Copies..............................................42  
Changing the Copy Settings.........................46  
Using Useful Copy Functions .......................47  
are Incorrect ...............................................148  
Cleaning Your Machine ..............................154  
Printing from a Memory Card................53  
Using the Memory Card................................53  
Printing Photograph......................................56  
Other Useful Functions.................................59  
11 Troubleshooting .................................. 159  
If the Power Disconnects Unexpectedly.....161  
An Error Message is Displayed on the  
LCD ............................................................161  
Cannot See the Display Properly on the  
Printing Photographs Directly from a  
Compliant Device...................................70  
Connecting to a PictBridge Compliant  
LCD/Cannot See the Display on the LCD ..166  
Ink Does Not Come Out/Printing is Blurred/  
Colors are Wrong/White Streaks/Straight  
Lines are Misaligned/Cannot Print to End  
of Job..........................................................166  
Back of Paper is Smudged/Paper Does  
Device...........................................................70  
Printing Photographs Directly from a  
PictBridge Compliant Device ........................73  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Canon  
Bubble Jet Direct Compatible Digital  
Not Feed Properly/Printed Surface is  
Camera.........................................................76  
Scratched ...................................................170  
Paper Jams ................................................174  
Document Jams..........................................177  
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index  
Sheet ..........................................................178  
Cannot Print Properly from the Digital  
5
6
Faxing......................................................79  
Preparing Your Machine for Fax...................79  
Sending Faxes............................................106  
Receiving Faxes .........................................118  
Camera.......................................................179  
Cannot Install the MP Drivers.....................181  
Cannot Connect to the Computer  
Printing from Your Computer .............123  
Printing with Windows.................................123  
Printing with Macintosh...............................126  
Properly ......................................................183  
Problems Receiving Faxes.........................183  
Problems Sending Faxes ...........................186  
Telephone Problems ..................................187  
Problems Scanning ....................................188  
An Error Message Appears on the  
7
Scanning Images..................................129  
About Scanning Images..............................129  
Scanning Methods......................................129  
Screen ........................................................192  
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem ...........196  
1
12 Appendix...............................................197  
Printing Area...............................................197  
How to Read the On-screen Manuals.........199  
Uninstalling the On-screen Manuals...........199  
Transporting Machine.................................200  
Specifications..............................................201  
Users in the U.S.A........................................206  
Pre-Installation Requirements for MP830...206  
Connection of the Equipment .....................206  
In Case of Equipment Malfunction..............207  
Rights of the Telephone Company .............207  
FCC Notice .................................................207  
Mercury Legislation.....................................208  
CANON U.S.A., INC. LIMITED WARRANTY  
--- (USA Only).............................................209  
Users in Canada...........................................212  
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon  
Facsimile Equipment ..................................212  
Customer Technical Supports ....................213  
Users in New Zealand ..................................214  
Index ............................................................215  
2
Canon MP830 Users Guide  
Copyright  
This manual is copyrighted by Canon Inc. with all rights reserved.  
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be reproduced in any form, in whole or in part, without  
the prior written consent of Canon Inc.  
© 2006 Canon Inc.  
Disclaimer  
Canon Inc. has reviewed this manual thoroughly in order that it will be an easy-to-use guide to your  
Canon MP830 Series. All statements, technical information and recommendations in this manual  
and in any guides or related documents are believed reliable, but the accuracy and completeness  
thereof are not guaranteed or warranted, and they are not intended to be, nor should they be  
understood to be, representation or warranties concerning the products described.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc., has determined that this  
product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.  
All information regarding non-Canon products was compiled from publicly available information. No  
representation is made regarding the accuracy thereof.  
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new generation of fax machines that  
use ITU-T V.34 standard 33.6 Kbps* modems. Super G3 High Speed Fax  
machines allow transmission time of approximately 3 seconds* per page which  
results in reduced telephone line charges.  
* Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on ITU-T No.1  
Chart (Standard Mode) at 33.6 Kbps modem speed.  
The Public Switched Telephone Network currently supports fax modem speeds of  
28.8 Kbps or lower, depending on telephone line conditions. Sending and  
receiving fax machines need to conform to ITU-T V.34 guidelines.  
This machine supports Exif 2.2 (also called “Exif Print”).  
Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras  
and printers.  
By connecting to an Exif Print-compliant digital camera, the camera’s image data  
at the time of shooting is used and optimized, yielding extremely high quality  
prints.  
3
Model Name  
K10270 (PIXMA MP830)  
Trademarks  
z "Windows" and "Internet Explorer" are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, registered in the  
United States and other countries.  
z "Macintosh" and "Mac" are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
z "SmartMedia" is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
z "MEMORY STICK", "Memory Stick PRO", "MEMORY STICK Duo" and "Memory Stick Pro Duo"  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
z "xD-Picture Card" is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.  
z "MultiMediaCard" is a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.  
z "SD Secure Digital memory card" and "miniSD Card" are trademarks of SD Association.  
z Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
How to Use the Documentation Provided  
Be sure to read this sheet first.  
Easy Setup Instructions  
(Printed documentation)  
This sheet includes instructions for setting up your machine and getting  
it ready for use.  
User’s Guide  
(This guide)  
Read this guide when starting to use the machine.  
After following instructions in the Easy Setup Instructions, read this  
guide for instructions on printing from your computer, direct photo  
printing from selected digital cameras, faxing, copying, and scanning.  
On-screen Manuals  
Refer to these guides as needed for full instructions on some of the  
more advanced features.  
Printer Driver Guide  
Refer to this guide for full instructions on setting the printer driver.  
Scan Guide  
Refer to this guide for full instructions on scanning operation and  
settings.  
Fax Driver Guide  
Refer to this guide for full instructions on setting the fax driver.  
Photo Application Guide  
Refer to this guide for instructions on using various application  
software included on the Setup CD-ROM.  
4
Safety Precautions  
Please read the safety warnings and cautions provided in this guide to ensure that you use your  
machine safely. Do not attempt to use the machine in any way not described in this guide.  
Warning  
You may cause an electric shock/fire or damage the machine if you ignore any of these safety  
precautions.  
Location  
Do not place the machine close to flammable solvents such as alcohol or thinners. If flammable  
substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in fire or  
electrical shock.  
Power supply  
Never attempt to plug or unplug the machine from the power supply when your hands are wet.  
This may result in electrical shock.  
Always push the plug all the way into the power outlet. If the prongs of the power plug come into  
contact with metal objects, it may result in fire or electrical shock.  
Never damage, modify, stretch or excessively bend or twist the power cord. Do not place heavy  
objects on the power cord. These actions may cause electrical damage and result in fire or  
electrical shock.  
Never plug the machine into a power socket that is shared with other equipment (extension lead/  
cord, 2- or 3-way adapter, etc.). This may result in fire or electrical shock.  
Plug the machine into a standard 120-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, (depending on your local electrical  
requirements), two-prong* grounded outlet. Operate the machine only from the type of power  
source indicated on the machine’s label or a fire, electrical shock, or malfunction may occur. If you  
are unsure of the type of power available, consult your local power company.  
* The shape of the plug and outlet may vary depending on the country of purchase.  
Do not allow the power cord to be near objects that emit heat. The outer cover of the power cord  
may melt resulting in fire or electrical shock.  
Never use the machine if the power cord is bundled or knotted. Knots in the cord may result in fire  
or electrical shock.  
If you detect smoke, unusual smells or strange noises around the machine, immediately unplug  
the machine at the power supply and contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Using the machine in such conditions may result in fire or electrical shock.  
Periodically, unplug the machine and use a dry cloth to wipe off any dust or dirt collected on the  
plug and the power outlet.  
If the machine is placed at a location exposed to a lot of dust, smoke, or high humidity, the dust  
collected on the plug absorbs moisture and may cause insulation failure and fire.  
Maintenance  
Do not service the machine yourself except as specifically described in this guide. If further  
servicing is required, contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
When storing the machine, choose a location where the machine is not exposed to dust. Dust  
accumulation may prevent the machine from operating properly.  
Use a damp cloth to clean the machine. Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene  
or thinners. If flammable solvents come in contact with electrical components inside the machine,  
it could cause a fire or electrical shock.  
Always turn OFF the power and unplug the machine from the power outlet before cleaning the  
machine.  
If you leave on or accidentally switch the machine ON while cleaning it, it may result in injury or  
damage the machine.  
5
Handling  
Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. There are no user serviceable parts inside  
the machine.  
The machine contains high-voltage components. Never attempt any maintenance procedure not  
described in this guide. Incorrect maintenance procedures may damage the machine, or cause a  
fire or electrical shock.  
Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also do not spill water,  
liquid, or flammable substances inside the machine. If these items come into contact with high-  
voltage parts inside the machine, it may result in fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped  
or spilled in the machine, turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord immediately with dry  
hands. Then contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Do not use flammable sprays near the machine.  
This could cause a fire or electrical shock if the spray comes into contact with electrical  
components inside the machine.  
There are high-voltage components inside the machine. If you are looking inside the machine to  
clear paper jams etc., do not allow metal objects such as jewelry to come into contact with the  
inside of the machine. Contact may result in burns or electrical shock.  
Others  
This product emits low level magnetic flux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities,  
please move away from this product and consult your doctor.  
When setting the machine near electric products with fluorescent lighting, separate the machine at  
least 5.9 inches (15 cm) from electric products equipped with fluorescent lighting. If you place it  
near to them, the machine may malfunction as a result of the noise emitted by the fluorescent  
lighting.  
When turning OFF the power, be sure to press [ON/OFF] and confirm that the Alarm Lamp has  
shut off. If you pull the power plug out of the wall outlet while the Alarm Lamp is lit or flashing, the  
Print Head is not protected, and you may not be able to print later.  
Caution  
You may cause injury or damage the machine if you ignore any of these safety precautions.  
Location  
Do not block or cover the ventilation port or any openings on the machine with objects, as it may  
cause the inside of machine to overheat and cause a fire.  
Place the machine on a flat, stable, vibration-free surface that is strong enough to support its  
weight. If the machine topples over, it may result in injury. (For the weight of the machine, see  
“Appendix” on page 197.)  
Do not use or store the machine outdoors.  
Do not install the machine near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields, such as  
speakers.  
To ensure proper ventilation, make sure the machine is approximately 4 inches (10 cm) away from  
walls and other equipment.  
Do not install the machine in a location that is very humid or dusty, in direct sunlight, outdoors, or  
close to a heating source.  
Installing in such a location may result in fire or electrical shock.  
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shocks, install the machine in a location with an ambient  
temperature range of 41°F to 95°F (5°C to 35°C) and humidity of 10% to 90% (condensation free).  
Do not place the machine on a thick rug or carpet.  
If fibers or dust come inside the machine, it could cause a fire.  
6
Power supply  
Never remove the plug by pulling on the cord.  
Pulling on the power cord may damage the cord and cause a fire or electrical shock.  
When turning OFF the power, be sure to press [ON/OFF] or unplug the machine.  
However, if the machine is unplugged during printing, the Print Head is not protected with the cap  
that prevents the ink from drying. This may affect the print quality of the machine when printing  
later.  
During electrical storms, turn OFF the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.  
Do not use an extension cord as this may result in fire or electrical shock.  
Ensure that the area around the power outlet is kept clear at all times so you can easily unplug the  
power cord if necessary. Otherwise you will be unable to disconnect the power plug in case of an  
emergency, and it may result in fire or electrical shock.  
Never use a power supply source other than the one rated for the machine in the country where  
you purchased the machine as it may result in fire or electrical shock.  
The operating requirement of this machine is as follows:  
120-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz (depending on local electrical requirements)  
Do not plug the machine into the same circuit as appliances such as an air conditioner, television,  
or copier. These devices generate electrical noise which may interfere with your machine’s  
operation.  
Whenever you turn OFF the power and unplug the machine, wait at least five seconds before you  
plug it in again.  
Use only the power cord that came with the machine. Using a different power cord may cause  
electric leakage or damage to the machine.  
Turn OFF the power and unplug the machine in the following conditions:  
z When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.  
z If liquid has spilled into the machine.  
z If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.  
z If the machine does not operate normally when you have followed the instructions in the guides  
included with your machine.  
z If the machine does not operate normally when you have followed the instructions provided in  
“Troubleshooting” on page 159.  
z If the machine has been dropped or damaged.  
z If the machine exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for servicing.  
Turn OFF the power and disconnect the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long  
period such as during holidays.  
The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.  
7
Handling  
Close the Document Cover gently to avoid catching your  
hand. Failing to do so may result in personal injury.  
Do not press down hard on the Document Cover when using  
the Platen Glass to scan thick books. This may damage the  
Platen Glass and Document Cover and/or result in personal  
injury.  
Do not place the following objects on top of the machine. If such objects come into contact with  
internal electrical components, the machine may short-circuit, resulting in fire or electrical shock.  
z Metal objects such as jewelry and watches  
z Containers of water or other liquids such as glasses, vases, or pot plants  
If water does spill inside the machine, turn OFF the power immediately by pressing [ON/OFF], and  
disconnect the power cord. Then, contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Do not touch the high-voltage electrical parts as this may result in electrical shock.  
Do not place heavy objects on top of the machine as these may topple over and result in injury.  
When removing paper jammed in the machine, be careful not to get ink on your hands or clothing.  
If ink gets on your hands or clothing, wash them soon in running water. If you use hot water, the ink  
may adhere and become difficult to remove.  
After printing, do not touch the electrical contacts of the Print Head. They will be hot and may  
result in burns or electrical shock.  
Do not subject the machine to strong physical shock or vibration. This can damage the machine’s  
components.  
Before moving the machine, turn OFF the power and unplug the machine.  
When moving the machine, carry the machine at both ends.  
A distinct change in performance may indicate a need for servicing.  
Do not insert your hands into the machine while it is printing.  
Parts inside the machine are moving and this may result in injury.  
Do not turn the machine upside down.  
Ink may leak out and stain clothing or the surrounding area.  
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the instructions in the guides since improper  
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and require extensive repair by a qualified  
technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
When storing or transporting the machine, do not tilt it, stand it on its side, or turn it upside down.  
Doing so may cause ink to leak out.  
8
Print Head/Ink tanks For safety reasons, store print heads and ink tanks out of the reach of small children.  
If a child ingests any ink, consult a doctor immediately.  
Do not shake print heads or ink tanks.  
Ink may leak out and stain clothing or the surrounding area.  
Never touch the Print Head.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to  
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:  
1. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or  
laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.  
2. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric  
shock from lightning.  
3. Do not use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
9
Reading the Document  
Symbols Used in This Guide  
Please read the list below of symbols used in this guide. The following symbols are used to indicate  
important instructions. Be sure to obey these instructions.  
Warning  
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not  
performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.  
Caution  
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons or damage to property if  
not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.  
Important  
Indicates operational warnings and restrictions. Be certain to read these items to operate the  
machine correctly and to avoid damage to the machine.  
Note  
Indicates notes for operation or additional explanations. Reading these is highly recommended.  
Read this when the machine is connected to a Windows® system.  
Read this when the machine is connected to a Macintosh® system.  
10  
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product  
and Use of Images  
It may be unlawful to make copies of, scan, print or use reproductions of the following documents.  
The list provided is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a legal representative in your  
jurisdiction.  
z Paper money  
z Money orders  
z Certificates of deposit  
z Traveler’s checks  
z Food stamps  
z Passports  
z Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled) z Immigration papers  
z Identifying badges or insignias  
z Selective service or draft papers  
z Checks or drafts issued by governmental  
agencies  
z Internal revenue stamps (canceled or  
uncanceled)  
z Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness  
z Stock certificates  
z Motor vehicle licenses and certificates of titlez Copyrighted works/works of art without  
permission of copyright owner  
11  
Chapter 1  
Before Printing  
Main Components and Their Functions  
Front View  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(11) (10) (9)  
(13) (12)  
(1) ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)  
Automatically scans in documents loaded in the Document Tray.  
(2) Feeder Cover  
Open when clearing jammed documents.  
(3) Document Guides  
Adjust these guides to match the document width.  
(4) Paper Support  
Supports paper loaded on the tray. Extend it before loading paper by putting your finger in  
the rounded indent and pulling out the extension until it stops.  
(5) Paper Guide  
When loading paper, ensure that the left edge just touches this guide.  
To move the Paper Guide, pinch the knob and slide in the appropriate direction.  
(6) Auto Sheet Feeder  
Load paper here before printing. Paper feeds automatically, one sheet at a time.  
(7) Cover Guide  
Align the right side of the paper to this guide.  
(8) Document Tray  
Open to load a document. Once loaded, the document is fed one page at a time. Load  
the document with the side you want to scan facing up.  
(9) Document Output Slot  
Documents scanned from the Document Tray are delivered here.  
(10)Document Cover  
Open this cover when loading a document on the Platen Glass.  
(11) Card Slot Cover  
Open to insert a memory card. For details, see “Inserting the Memory Card” on page 54.  
Before Printing  
12  
Chapter 1  
(12)Direct Print Port  
Used when printing directly from a digital camera or a digital video camcorder or a mobile  
phone equipped with a camera compatible with PictBridge or Canon Bubble Jet Direct.  
(13)Paper Output Tray  
Open this tray before copying or printing by pressing the Open Button. However, even if it  
is closed, the tray will open automatically when copying or printing is started.  
Close the tray when it is not in use.  
(14)  
(15)  
(16)  
(17)  
(18)  
(14)Platen Glass  
Used to load a document to be processed.  
(15)Scanner Lock Switch  
Locks the internal fluorescent lamp that is located underneath the Platen Glass (scanning  
lamp), to be used when transporting the machine. Make sure to unlock it before turning  
the machine on.  
(16)Operation Panel  
Used to change the settings or operate the machine. See “Operation Panel Name and  
Functions” on page 16.  
(17)Open Button  
Press this button to open the Paper Output Tray.  
(18)Cassette  
Load paper to be used regularly here. Paper feeds automatically, one sheet at a time.  
*Photo Stickers and 2.13" x 3.39"/ 54.0 x 86.0 mm size paper are not loadable in the  
Cassette.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
13  
Rear View and Interior  
(22)  
(23)  
(24)  
(25)  
(19)  
(20)  
(21)  
(31)  
(26)  
(30) (29)  
(28)  
(27)  
(19)Print Head Lock Lever  
Used to fix the Print Head.  
Important  
Do not pull up this lever after installing the Print Head.  
(20)Ink Tank Lamp  
Lights or flashes red to indicate the status of the ink tank. You can check the status of  
each ink tank according to the way its lamp flashes. See “Ink Tank Lamps” on page 15.  
(21)Print Head Holder  
Used to install a Print Head.  
(22)Scanning Unit (Printer Cover)  
This is the unit used to scan documents. Open when replacing the ink tanks or clearing  
jammed paper.  
(23)Inner Cover  
Open this cover when replacing the ink tanks.  
(24)Card Slot  
Set the memory card here. For details, see “Inserting the Memory Card” on page 54.  
(25)Access Lamp  
Lights when a memory card is inserted into the Card Slot. This lamp flashes while the  
machine is reading or writing data from/to the memory card. For details, see “Inserting  
the Memory Card” on page 54.  
Before Printing  
14  
Chapter 1  
(26)Duplexing Transport Unit  
Open when clearing jammed paper after pulling out the Cassette.  
(27)Power Connector  
This is the connector used to connect the provided power cord.  
(28)Rear Cover  
Open when clearing jammed paper.  
(29)External Device Jack  
Connects the external device.  
(30)Telephone Line Jack  
Connects with the telephone line.  
(31)USB Connector (for computer)  
This is the connector used to connect the machine to a computer using a USB cable.  
Important  
While the machine is printing from or scanning images to the computer, or the computer is  
in the sleep mode or standby mode, do not disconnect and connect the USB cable.  
Note  
z For information on how to install the Print Head and ink tanks, refer to the Easy Setup  
Instructions.  
Ink Tank Lamps  
z You can check the status of each ink tank according to the way its lamp flashes.  
On: The machine is ready to print.  
Slow flashing (about three seconds): Ink is low. Prepare a new ink tank. For details,  
see “Getting the Ink Level Information” on page 142.  
Fast flashing (about one second): Ink tank is empty, or the machine is not ready due to  
an error.  
Off: Make sure all the ink tanks are installed properly. If an Ink Tank Lamp remains unlit  
even after reinstalling ink tanks, an error has occurred and the machine is not ready to  
print.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
15  
Operation Panel Name and Functions  
(1) (2) (3)  
(4)  
(5) (6) (7)  
(8)  
(9) (10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(14) (16) (18) (20)  
(15) (17) (19) (21)  
(23) (25) (27) (29)  
(22) (24) (26) (28) (30) (31)  
(13)  
(1) [ON/OFF]  
Turns the machine ON and OFF. Before turning ON the machine, make sure the  
Document Cover is closed.  
Note  
z The machine cannot receive faxes when the power is turned OFF.  
z The power cannot be turned OFF while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or  
when there are unsent faxes stored in the machine's memory.  
(2) [COPY]  
Switches the machine to Copy mode. Flashes when the machine is turned on.  
(3) [FAX]  
Switches the machine to Fax mode.  
(4) [SCAN]  
Switches the machine to Scan mode. This button is used when the machine is connected  
to a computer. (Refer to the Scan Guide.)  
(5) [MEMORY CARD]  
Switches the machine to Memory card mode.  
(6) In Use/Memory Lamp  
Flashes when the telephone line is in use. Lights when there are documents stored in the  
machine's memory.  
(7) Alarm Lamp  
Lights or flashes orange, when an error occurs, or when paper or ink has run out.  
(8) LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)  
Displays messages, menu selections, and the operation status.  
(9) [Menu]  
Used to display menus.  
(10)[Settings]  
Use to configure the page size, media type, and image correction settings.  
(11) Numeric Buttons  
Enter numerical values such as the number of copies, as well as fax/telephone numbers  
and characters.  
(12)[Stop/Reset]  
Cancels operations. If this button is pressed during printing, the machine aborts printing.  
(13)One-Touch Speed Dial Key  
Push these buttons to dial pre-registered fax/telephone numbers or group.  
Before Printing  
16  
Chapter 1  
(14)Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp  
Lit when the Auto Sheet Feeder is selected.  
(15)Cassette Lamp  
Lit when the Cassette is selected.  
(16)[Feed Switch]  
Selects the paper source. Press this toggle switch to change the paper source between  
the Auto Sheet Feeder and Cassette.  
(17)[Photo Index Sheet]  
Switches to Photo Index Sheet mode. See “Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet” on  
page 66.  
(18)[Enlarge/Reduce]  
Sets the enlargement or reduction ratio for copying.  
(19)[Search]  
Looks up target photos in the memory card using the shooting date as the search key.  
See “Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)” on page 59.  
(20)[Two-Sided]  
Specifies settings for <Two-sided copy>.  
(21)[FAX Quality]  
Sets the resolution of the fax you are sending.  
(22)[Back]  
Allows you to return to the previous screen.  
(23)[OK]  
Finalizes your selection for the menu or setting item.  
Restores the machine to normal operation after a printing error was resolved, or if paper  
jams are cleared. Ejects documents remaining in the ADF.  
(24)[ ] [ ] [ ] [  
]
Scroll through menu selections, and increase or decrease the number of copies. You can  
use these buttons when < >, < >, < >, and < > are displayed on the LCD. Also  
[
] cancels the entered character, and [ ] enters a space between characters when  
entering characters.  
(25)[Trimming]  
Use to crop the photo that is displayed. See “Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)” on  
page 60.  
(26)[Tone]  
Switches temporarily to tone dialing. Also changes the mode when entering characters.  
(27)[Redial/Pause]  
Redials the last dialed number using Numeric buttons. Also enters pauses between or  
after numbers when dialing or registering numbers.  
(28)[Coded Dial]  
Press this button and a two-digit code to dial a pre-registered fax/telephone number or  
group.  
(29)[Hook]  
Engages or disengages the telephone line.  
(30)[Black]  
Starts black & white copying, scanning, or faxing.  
(31)[Color]  
Starts color copying, photo printing, scanning, or faxing.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
17  
Turning the Machine ON and OFF  
Turn on the machine before starting printing.  
Turning on the Machine  
Before turning on the machine, confirm that the Print Head and ink tanks are set into place.  
Note  
If preparatory operations above are not yet finished, follow the Easy Setup Instructions to  
complete them.  
1
Press [ON/OFF].  
[COPY] flashes green for a while, and then turns on.  
Note  
If the Alarm Lamp lights or flashes orange and an error message is displayed on the LCD, see  
“An Error Message is Displayed on the LCD” on page 161.  
Turning off the Machine  
1
To turn off the machine, press [ON/OFF].  
The machine is off when the currently selected Mode button (e.g. COPY) stops flashing and  
all Operation Panel lamps are off.  
Important  
When removing the power plug after turning off the machine, be sure to check that all the  
lamps on the Operation Panel are not lit. If the power plug is removed from the wall outlet with  
the lamps on the Operation Panel lit or blinking, the machine cannot protect its Print Head and  
may be unable to print.  
See “Keeping the Best Printing Results” on page 147.  
Note  
The power cannot be turned OFF while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when  
there are unsent faxes stored in the machine's memory.  
Before Printing  
18  
Chapter 1  
Setting the Power Save Mode  
The machine enters Power save mode if not operated for a certain interval. In the Power save  
mode, the internal fluorescent lamp are turned off, and the selected Mode Lamp stays lit. You  
can configure the interval that the machine waits before entering Power save mode. See  
“Power save setting” on page 141.  
When you try to perform any operation such as copying, faxing, or scanning, the machine will  
exit from Power save mode.  
If you use the machine frequently, we recommend that you set the Power save transfer time  
to 1 hour or 8 hours.  
The Screen-saver Mode  
The LCD goes out if the machine is not operated for 5 minutes. Press any button to restore  
the display. You cannot change the period before the LCD goes out.  
Loading Documents to Copy, Fax, or Scan  
This section describes how to load the document.  
Document Requirements  
The documents you load on the Platen Glass or the ADF for copying, faxing, or scanning must  
meet these requirements:  
Platen Glass  
ADF  
Multipage documents of the same size,  
thickness, and weight  
Document  
type  
z Documents  
z Photographs  
z Book  
z Documents that are not suitable for the  
ADF  
Max. 8.5" x 11.7" / 216 x 297 mm  
Max. 8.5" x 14.0" (216 x 356 mm)  
Min. 5.8" x 5.8" (148 x 148 mm)  
Size (W x L)  
Quantity  
Only A4- or Letter-sized originals for two-  
sided copying or scanning  
1 sheet  
z Max. 35 pages of A4- or Letter-sized  
sheets (20 lb. or 75 g/m2 paper), up to  
5 mm in height  
z Max. 30 pages of Legal-sized sheets  
(20 lb. or 75 g/m2 paper), up to 4 mm in  
height  
z 1 sheet for sizes other than these  
Max. 0.8" / 20 mm  
0.002" to 0.005" (0.06 to 0.13 mm)  
Thickness  
Weight  
13 to 24 lb. (50 to 90 g/m2)  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
19  
Loading Documents  
Load documents that you want to copy or scan on the Platen Glass or the ADF.  
Note  
z Make sure any glue, ink, correction fluid, or the like is completely dry before loading the  
document.  
z Remove all staples, paper clips, and the like before feeding the document.  
z Load legal-size documents in the ADF.  
z Do not load the following types of documents in the ADF. They will jam.  
– Wrinkled or creased paper  
– Curled paper  
– Torn paper  
– Paper with holes  
– Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper  
– Surface treated paper  
– Onion skin or thin paper  
– Photograph or thick paper  
z Using The Platen Glass  
1
2
Lift the Document Cover.  
Load your document on the Platen Glass.  
z Place your document face down on the Platen Glass.  
z Align the upper left corner of your document with the alignment mark on the upper left  
corner of the Platen Glass.  
Before Printing  
20  
Chapter 1  
Note  
z The machine cannot scan the area within about 0.08" / 2 mm from the rear edge, and  
within about 0.08" / 2 mm from the left edge of the Platen Glass.  
z You can also scan in originals that are up to 0.8" / 20 mm thick, such as books. Set them  
on the Platen Glass in the same way as documents.  
3
Gently close the Document Cover.  
z Using The ADF  
Note  
z Set a document on the Platen Glass if you want to scan it at optimum quality.  
z When the document is set to the ADF, the first 0.08"/2mm of the leading edge of the  
document (the part that is first scanned) will not be read.  
1
2
Remove any documents from the Platen Glass.  
Open the Document Tray.  
3
Load the document in the ADF (1).  
Load the document with the side you want to copy, fax, or scan face side up in the ADF.  
(1)  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
21  
4
Adjust the Document Guides to match the document width (2).  
(2)  
(A)  
Note  
Ensure that the edge of the document stack is in line with the Paper Size Mark imprinted on  
the Document Tray (A).  
Loading Paper  
This section describes how to load paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette.  
Paper Handling  
z Recommended Paper and Requirements  
Model*1  
Media Type  
Paper Support Load Limit  
Printer Driver  
Setting for  
[Media Type]  
Auto Sheet Feeder  
Cassette  
Plain Paper  
0.52"/13 mm  
0.52"/13 mm  
[Plain Paper]  
High  
Resolution  
Paper  
HR-101N 80 sheets (A4, Letter)  
80 sheets (A4, Letter)  
[High Resolution  
Paper]  
Super White  
Paper  
SW-201 0.52"/13 mm (A4, Letter) 0.52"/13 mm (A4,  
Letter)  
[Plain Paper]  
Glossy Photo  
Paper  
GP-401 10 sheets (A4, Letter),  
10 sheets (A4, Letter),  
[Glossy Photo  
Paper]  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm,  
Credit Card)  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm), Not  
supported (Credit  
Card)*5  
Before Printing  
22  
Chapter 1  
Model*1  
Media Type  
Paper Support Load Limit  
Auto Sheet Feeder Cassette  
Printer Driver  
Setting for  
[Media Type]  
Glossy Photo  
Paper  
“Everyday Use”  
GP-501 10 sheets (A4),  
10 sheets (A4),  
[Glossy Photo  
Paper]  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
Matte Photo  
Paper  
MP-101 10 sheets (A4, Letter),  
10 sheets (A4, Letter),  
[Matte Photo  
Paper]  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
Photo Paper  
Plus Double  
Sided*2, *3  
PP-101D 10 sheets (A4, Letter, 5" 10 sheets (A4, Letter, 5" [Photo Paper  
x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8  
mm)  
x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8  
mm)  
Plus Double  
Sided]  
Photo Paper  
Plus Glossy*3  
PP-101  
10 sheets (A4, Letter, 5" 10 sheets (A4, Letter, 5" [Photo Paper  
x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8  
mm),  
x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8  
mm),  
Plus Glossy]  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
Photo Paper  
Plus Semi-  
gloss*3  
SG-101 10 sheets (A4, Letter),  
10 sheets (A4, Letter),  
[Photo Paper  
Plus Glossy]  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
Photo Paper  
Pro*3  
PR-101  
PS-101  
10 sheets (A4, Letter),  
10 sheets (A4, Letter),  
[Photo Paper  
Pro]  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
20 sheets (4" x 6" /  
101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
Photo  
Stickers*4  
1 sheet  
Not loadable*5  
[Photo Paper  
Plus Glossy]  
Transparencies CF-102  
30 sheets  
1 sheet  
30 sheets  
1 sheet  
[Transparencies]  
T-Shirt  
Transfers*2  
TR-301  
[T-Shirt  
Transfers]  
Envelopes*2  
10 envelopes  
5 envelopes  
[Envelope]  
Paper having a "Model Number" is Canon specialty media.  
You may not be able to purchase some Canon branded paper depending on your country.  
*1 Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number. Purchase paper by the name.  
*2 This is available only when printing from your computer.  
*3 When loading a stack of paper, the printed side may be marked when it is fed in. If this  
happens, load paper one sheet at a time.  
*4 When Windows is being used, you can specify the print setting easily by using the Easy-Photo  
Print provided with the Setup CD-ROM.  
*5 Feeding from the Cassette can damage the machine. Always load in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
23  
Note  
z For specifying the page size and media type when performing copy direct printing, see  
“Changing the Print Settings” on page 37.  
z When using plain paper (64 gsm or 17 lb), up to 150 sheets (13 mm or 0.52 inches in  
height) can be loaded in the Auto Sheet Feeder and Cassette respectively. Select [Plain  
Paper] from [Media Type] in the printer driver.  
For a detailed description of printing media types, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
z Media types you cannot use  
Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will not only produce unsatisfactory  
results, but can also cause the machine to jam or malfunction.  
z Folded, curled or wrinkled paper  
z Damp paper  
z Excessively thin paper (less than 64 gsm or 17 lb)  
z Excessively thick paper* (more than 105 gsm or 28 lb)(non-Canon branded paper)  
z Picture postcards  
z Postcards affixed with photos or stickers  
z Envelopes with double flaps  
z Envelopes with sticker flaps  
z Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface  
z Any type of paper with holes  
z Handling paper  
z Hold the paper as closely as possible to its edges and try not to touch the print surface. Print  
quality will deteriorate if the print surface is damaged or becomes dirty.  
z Do not touch the print surface until the ink has dried. If prints get wet, do not touch the printed  
side until they dry.  
z Paper may curl or the print surface may become smudged if you use a large amount of ink for  
printing. In this case, select <ON> for <Prevent paper abrasion> under <Device settings>.  
See “If printing surface abrasion is not resolved even after taking the actions above:” on  
page 173. Do not print photos or documents that contain graphics on paper that curls easily.  
Remove this kind of paper for printing text-only documents.  
z If the paper is curled, uncurl it before printing. To uncurl the paper, see “Paper is curled.” on  
page 172.  
z Put unused paper back into the package, and store them out of direct sunlight in a place  
where the temperature and humidity are low. Keep them on a level surface to avoid curling  
and wrinkling.  
z If the printed area is traced with a highlight pen or paint-stick or stained with water or sweat,  
ink may blur depending on the paper.  
z Photo Paper Pro guidelines  
z Do not touch the print surface until the ink is dry (approx. 30 minutes). Colors in dark images  
may appear indistinct at first, but will become clearer after approx. 30 minutes.  
z Images may become smudged if you place them in an album before the ink is completely dry.  
It is recommended that you allow the ink to dry for 24 hours.  
z Do not attempt to dry the ink with a hair dryer or by exposing printouts to direct sunlight.  
z Do not store or display printouts in hot, damp, or humid conditions. Never expose them to  
heat or direct sunlight.  
Before Printing  
24  
Chapter 1  
z Store printouts in photo albums, photo frames, or presentation binders to protect them from  
direct exposure to air or sunlight.  
z Do not mount printouts in an adhesive-type album as you may not be able to remove them.  
z Be aware that some types of clear plastic folders and albums may cause the edges of the  
paper to turn yellow.  
About the Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette  
You can load paper in both the Auto Sheet Feeder and Cassette.  
Loading paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder is easy, and is convenient if you frequently switch to  
and print on various sizes or types of paper.  
Loading paper in the Cassette allows you to print without reloading paper for each job. This is  
convenient for loading a certain type of paper, such as plain paper, you regularly print onto.  
Loading paper in both the Auto Sheet Feeder and Cassette makes the following paper feed  
methods available:  
* Some types of paper cannot be used on the Cassette. See “Recommended Paper and  
Requirements” on page 22.  
z Changing the paper source to feed different types/sizes of paper  
If you load plain paper in the Cassette and photo paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder, changing the  
paper source allows you to print on both types of paper without removing and reloading paper.  
To change the paper source, use [Feed Switch] on the machine or printer driver.  
You can also specify the type/size of paper to be fed from the Cassette for regular use with the  
printer driver. For example, you can specify that Letter-sized plain paper is always fed from the  
Cassette whenever you print.  
Note  
z For information on page size, media type, and paper support load limit for Auto Sheet  
Feeder or Cassette, see “Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
z For information on the printer driver settings, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
(B)  
(A)  
(C)  
(A) You can switch between paper loaded in the Auto Sheet Feeder (e.g., 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4  
mm) or the Cassette (e.g., A4/Letter-sized paper).  
(B) Auto Sheet Feeder  
(C) Cassette  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
25  
z Continuous printing on the same type/size of paper by using both the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and Cassette together  
If the Auto Sheet Feeder or Cassette runs out of paper, the paper source automatically switches  
to the other one. This is useful for printing onto a large volume of paper.  
Important  
z When printing from a computer, you need to set this feature with the printer driver. For  
details, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
z This feature can be used only when paper of the same size and media type are loaded in  
the Cassette and Auto Sheet Feeder.  
z When printing from a computer, this feature can be used only when both paper sources are  
loaded with paper other than Credit Card- or Legal-sized paper.  
z In Copy mode or Memory card mode, this feature can be used only when both paper  
sources are loaded with paper other than Credit Card- or Legal-sized paper.  
z In Fax mode, this feature can be used only when both paper sources are loaded with A4-  
or Letter-sized plain paper.  
Note  
For information on page size, media type, and paper support load limit for Auto Sheet Feeder  
or Cassette, see “Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
(A)  
(A) If the Auto Sheet Feeder runs out of paper, the paper source automatically changes to the  
Cassette.  
Before Printing  
26  
Chapter 1  
Changing the Paper Source  
Before printing, confirm that the location where you have loaded paper is selected as a paper  
source. Press [Feed Switch] to change the paper source.  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(A) Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp  
(B) [Feed Switch]  
(C) Cassette Lamp  
Note  
z Press [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the Cassette.  
z You can also select the paper source with the printer driver when printing from the  
computer. For details, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
Loading the Print Media in the Auto Sheet Feeder  
Important  
Load plain paper (A4-, letter-, or legal-size) when receiving faxes.  
z Loading Paper  
Note  
For detailed information on the specialty media Canon provides for use with its various  
printers, see “Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
1
Flatten the four corners of the paper before loading it.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
27  
Note  
z Align the edges of paper neatly before loading. Loading paper without aligning the edges  
may cause paper jams.  
z When paper is curled, hold the opposing curled corners and gently bend them in the  
opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat. See “Paper is curled.” on  
page 172.  
2
Prepare to load paper.  
(1) Open the Paper Support, then pull out the Paper Support Extension to support the paper.  
(2) Press the Open Button to open the Paper Output Tray.  
(3) Open the Paper Output Tray Extension completely.  
(4) Press [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp (A) lights.  
(4)  
(A)  
(1)  
(3)  
(2)  
Note  
You can also select the paper source with the printer driver. For details, refer to the Printer  
Driver Guide.  
3
Load the paper.  
(1) Load the paper into the Auto Sheet Feeder with the print side facing UP.  
(2) Align the paper stack against the Cover Guide on the right side of the Paper Support.  
Important  
Ensure that the Cover Guide stands when you load paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
(3) Pinch the Paper Guide and slide it against the left side of the paper stack.  
Before Printing  
28  
Chapter 1  
(A)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Important  
Do not load the paper beyond this Load Limit Mark (A).  
Note  
z You can use general copy paper or Canon’s Super White Paper SW-201.  
z You can load up to 150 sheets of plain paper (64 gsm or 17 lb, 13 mm or 0.52 inches in  
height) in the Auto Sheet Feeder. However, the paper may not be fed normally  
depending on its media type or your environment where the temperature and humidity  
are high or low. In that case, reduce the amount of paper to half (approx. 0.2" / 5 mm in  
height).  
z Remove the printed sheets from the Paper Output Tray before the count reaches 50.  
z Do not touch the printed surfaces until the ink dries. For specific drying times, refer to  
the instructions packaged with your media.  
z Loading Envelopes  
Use either European DL or US Comm. Env. #10 size envelopes.  
Important  
z Envelopes can be used only when printing from a computer.  
z Do not use envelopes with embossed or treated surfaces, a double flap, pressure seals or  
sticker flaps.  
z Select either [DL Env.] or [Comm. Env. #10] according to the envelope size you are using.  
z The printed image will be upside down depending on the application. If this occurs, open  
the printer properties dialog box then select the [Rotate 180 degrees] check box on the  
[Page Setup] tab.  
For information on the printer driver settings, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
1
Load the envelope against the Cover Guide on the right side of the Paper Support  
with the print side facing UP, and the rear flaps DOWN on the left.  
Important  
Ensure that the Cover Guide stands when you load paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
29  
Note  
A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded at once.  
2
3
4
Pinch the Paper Guide and slide it against the left side of the envelope.  
Press [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp lights.  
Select [Envelope] in [Media Type], and then select [DL Env.] or [Comm. Env. #10] in  
[Page Size].  
For information on the printer driver settings, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
(A)  
1
2
3
(B)  
Note  
z Fold the envelope flap shut (A).  
z Printing direction (B).  
z Loading Other Small-Sized Paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder  
Important  
Loading plain paper cut to 4" x 6" / 101.6 mm x 152.4 mm, 5" x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8 mm, or 2.13"  
x 3.39" / 54.0 x 86.0 mm (Credit Card) size for a trial printing can cause paper jams.  
1
Load the paper into the Auto Sheet Feeder with the print side facing UP and align  
the Cover Guide on the right side of the Paper Support.  
Important  
Ensure that the Cover Guide stands when you load paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
Note  
z Load the paper lengthways regardless of the direction of the document.  
z You can load up to 20 sheets of 4" x 6" or Credit Card-sized paper, and 10 sheets of 5" x  
7"-sized paper.  
2
Pinch the Paper Guide and slide it against the left side of the paper stack.  
Before Printing  
30  
Chapter 1  
3
4
Press [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp lights.  
When performing copy direct printing without using a computer, press [Settings] to  
select the page size. When using the machine connected to a computer, select the  
page size of the loaded paper from [Page Size] in the printer driver.  
For a detailed description of the printer driver settings, see “Printing with Windows” on  
page 123, or “Printing with Macintosh” on page 126.  
1
3
2
Important  
Always load paper in portrait orientation (A). Loading paper in landscape orientation (B) can  
cause the paper to be jammed.  
(A)  
(B)  
Note  
We recommend using genuine Canon photo media when printing photographs. See  
“Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
31  
Loading the Print Media in the Cassette  
Depending on page size and media type, some paper must always be loaded in the Auto Sheet  
Feeder.  
If you intend to use only the Cassette, check any usage restrictions in advance.  
See “Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
Important  
Load plain paper (A4- or letter-size) when receiving faxes.  
z Loading Paper  
Note  
For detailed information on the specialty media Canon provides for use with its various  
printers, see “Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
1
Flatten the four corners of the paper before loading it.  
Note  
z Align the edges of paper neatly before loading. Loading paper without aligning the edges  
may cause paper jams.  
z When paper is curled, hold the opposing curled corners and gently bend them in the  
opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat. See “Paper is curled.” on  
page 172.  
2
Prepare to load paper.  
(1) Pull out the Cassette from the machine.  
(1)  
3
Load the paper. (Print side facing DOWN)  
(1) Load the paper into the Cassette with the print side facing DOWN.  
(2) Align the paper stack against the right side of the Cassette.  
Before Printing  
32  
Chapter 1  
(3) Slide the Paper Guides to fit the loaded paper stack.  
(A)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Important  
Do not load the paper beyond this Load Limit Mark (A).  
Note  
z You can use general copy paper or Canon’s Super White Paper SW-201.  
z You can load up to 150 sheets of plain paper (64 gsm or 17 lb, 13 mm or 0.52 inches in  
height) in the Cassette. However, do not stack more than 50 sheets in the Paper Output  
Tray.  
z Do not touch the printed surfaces until the ink dries. For specific drying times, refer to the  
instructions packaged with your media.  
4
Insert the Cassette into the machine.  
(1) Insert the Cassette into the machine.  
Push the Cassette all the way into the machine.  
(1)  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
33  
5
Prepare the Paper Output Tray.  
(1) Press the Open Button to open the Paper Output Tray.  
(2) Open the Paper Output Tray Extension completely.  
(3) Press [Feed Switch] so that the Cassette Lamp (A) lights.  
(3)  
(A)  
(2)  
(1)  
Note  
You can also select the paper source with the printer driver. For details, refer to the Printer  
Driver Guide.  
z Loading Envelopes  
Use either European DL or US Comm. Env. #10 size envelopes.  
Important  
z Envelopes can be used only when printing from a computer.  
z Do not use envelopes with embossed or treated surfaces, a double flap, pressure seals or  
sticker flaps.  
z Select either [DL Env.] or [Comm. Env. #10] according to the envelope size you are using.  
z The printed image will be upside down depending on the application. If this occurs, open  
the printer properties dialog box then select the [Rotate 180 degrees] check box on the  
[Page Setup] tab.  
For information on the printer driver settings, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
1
Align the envelope stack against the right side of the Cassette with the print side  
facing DOWN, and the rear flaps UP on the left side.  
Note  
A maximum of 5 envelopes can be loaded at once.  
Before Printing  
34  
Chapter 1  
2
Slide the Paper Guides against the sides of the envelope.  
(A)  
1
2
Note  
Fold the envelope flap shut (A).  
3
Press [Feed Switch] so that the Cassette Lamp lights.  
3
(B)  
Note  
Printing direction (B).  
4
Select [Envelope] in [Media Type], and then select [DL Env.] or [Comm. Env. #10] in  
[Page Size].  
For information on the printer driver settings, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
35  
z Loading 4" x 6"- or 5" x 7"-Sized Paper in the Cassette  
Important  
z Do not leave photo paper, such as Photo Paper Pro, in the Cassette for a long time. This  
may cause paper discoloration due to natural aging.  
z If you are using photo paper such as Photo Paper Pro and have loaded them in the  
Cassette, the printout may have roller traces on the print surface. To avoid this, load paper  
in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
z Loading plain paper cut to 4" x 6" / 101.6 mm x 152.4 mm or 5" x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8 mm  
size for a trial printing can cause paper jams.  
1
Load the paper into the Cassette with the print side facing DOWN.  
Note  
z Load the paper lengthways regardless of the direction of the document.  
z You can load up to 20 sheets of 4" x 6"-sized paper or up to 10 sheets of 5" x 7"-sized  
paper.  
2
3
Align the paper stack against the right side of the Cassette.  
Slide the Paper Guides to fit the loaded paper stack.  
1
2
3
4
Press [Feed Switch] so that the Cassette Lamp lights.  
4
Before Printing  
36  
Chapter 1  
5
When performing copy direct printing without using a computer, press [Settings] to  
select the page size. When using the machine connected to a computer, select the  
page size of the loaded paper from [Page Size] in the printer driver.  
For a detailed description of the printer driver settings, see “Printing with Windows” on  
page 123, or “Printing with Macintosh” on page 126.  
Important  
Always load paper in portrait orientation (A). Loading paper in landscape orientation (B) can  
cause the paper to be jammed.  
(A)  
(B)  
Note  
We recommend using genuine Canon photo media when printing photographs. See  
“Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
Changing the Print Settings  
This section describes the Settings screen that can be specified on the Operation Panel when  
copying, or printing from memory card.  
To Change Print Settings  
You can change the print settings such as page size, media type, bordered or borderless print,  
etc.  
z How to change the Settings screen  
This section describes the steps to specify the page size for Memory card mode to <4" x 6"> as  
an example. For information on each item, see “Print Setting Items” on page 39.  
1
Display the Settings screen.  
(1) Press [Settings].  
The Settings screen is displayed.  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
37  
2
3
4
5
Select the Setting tab.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the Setting tab.  
Select tab 1 here.  
Select the setting item.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the setting item.  
Select <A4> here.  
Change the setting.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to change the setting.  
Change to <4" x 6"> here.  
Complete setting.  
(1) Press [Settings].  
Return to the Settings screen.  
Before Printing  
38  
Chapter 1  
Print Setting Items  
Each tab contains the following setting items. To change the tab, use [ ] to select the tab and  
use [ ] or [ ].  
Note  
Depending on the functions specified in the Copy or Memory card mode, some setting items  
cannot be specified in combination.  
z Copy mode  
This section describes the Settings screen for Copy mode.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
Tab 1  
You can specify the paper settings for printing or print quality.  
(1) You can specify the page size.  
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 14", A4, B5, A5, 4" x 6", 5" x 7", credit card  
Important  
Some page sizes cannot be loaded in the Cassette and should be loaded in the Auto  
Sheet Feeder.  
Note  
Some of these are not available depending on the country of purchase.  
(2) You can specify the media type.  
Plain paper, Photo Paper Pro, Photo Plus, Matte Photo, Glossy Photo  
(3) You can adjust image quality according to the documents you want to copy.  
Fast, Standard, High  
Note  
z <Fast> can be selected when <Plain paper> is selected as the media type.  
z When using <Fast> with media type set to <Plain paper>, if the quality is different from  
that expected, select <Standard> or <High> and try copying again.  
z Select <High> to copy in grayscale. Grayscale renders tones in a range of grays  
instead of black or white.  
(4) You can specify the reduction or enlargement method.  
Same magnification, Preset ratio, Zoom (25 - 400%), Fit-to-page  
Tab 2  
You can specify auto intensity.  
(5) This function automatically adjusts the intensity of the document on the Platen Glass.  
Auto intensity ON, Auto intensity OFF  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
39  
z Memory card mode  
This section describes the Settings screen for Memory card mode.  
Tab 1  
You can specify the settings such as the paper, bordered/borderless, and Date/file no.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
Note  
You can change the print settings on this screen when a PictBridge compliant device is  
connected to this machine.  
(1) Select the page size.  
8.5" x 11", A4, 4" x 6", 5" x 7", credit card  
Important  
Some page sizes cannot be loaded in the Cassette and should be loaded in the Auto  
Sheet Feeder.  
Note  
Some of these are not available depending on the country of purchase.  
(2) Select the media type.  
Plain paper, Photo Paper Pro, Photo Plus, Matte Photo, Glossy Photo  
(3) Select the print quality.  
Standard, High  
(4) Select bordered or borderless print.  
Bordered, Borderless  
Note  
When <Plain paper> is selected in <Media type>, bordered printing will be performed  
even if you select <Borderless>.  
(5) Select whether to print the shooting date, file no., or not.  
No date/file no., Print date only, Print file no. only, Print date & file no.  
Before Printing  
40  
Chapter 1  
Tab 2  
Allows you to optimize photos with the functions below.  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(1) Red eye correction ON, Red eye correction OFF  
When <Red eye correction ON> is selected, portraits with a red eye caused by flash  
photography are corrected in print.  
(2) Activate/deactivate Vivid photo function.  
This function makes green and blue more lively.  
Vivid photo ON, Vivid photo OFF  
(3) Activate/deactivate the Photo Optimizer pro function.  
This function automatically optimizes brightness and tone of a photo.  
Photo optimizer pro ON, Photo optimizer pro OFF  
(4) Activate/deactivate the Noise reduction function.  
This function reduces the noise on blue areas like the sky as well as on black areas.  
Noise reduction ON, Noise reduction OFF  
(5) Activate/deactivate Face brightener function.  
This function brightens a darkened face on the photo taken against the light.  
Face brightener ON, Face brightener OFF  
(6) Choosing <Image optimizer ON> enables you to correct and smooth the jagged contours  
for printing.  
Image optimizer ON, Image optimizer OFF  
(7) Adjust brightness.  
Brightness +2, Brightness +1, Brightness standard, Brightness -1, Brightness -2  
(8) Adjust contrast.  
Contrast +2, Contrast +1, Contrast standard, Contrast -1, Contrast -2  
(9) Adjust color hue.  
Color hue red +2, Color hue red +1, Color hue original, Color hue yellow +1, Color hue  
yellow +2  
(10)Select the type of special effects applied to the photo, such as printing in sepia tones or  
with a sketch illustration like effect.  
No effects, Sepia, Simulate illustration  
Before Printing  
Chapter 1  
41  
Chapter 2  
Copying  
Making Copies  
This section describes the basic procedure to make copies.  
1
Prepare for copying.  
(1) Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
(2) Press [COPY].  
(3) Load paper.  
See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
(4) Ensure that the proper paper source is selected.  
See “Changing the Paper Source” on page 27.  
Note  
Specify [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the Cassette.  
(5) Load the document on the Platen Glass or the ADF.  
Note  
For information on the types and conditions of documents which you can copy, see “Loading  
Documents” on page 20.  
2
Start copying.  
(1) Check the page size and media type.  
Note  
Press [Settings] to check or change the page size, media type, or other settings. See To  
Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ], or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies.  
(2)  
(1)  
The following information is displayed as well.  
Intensity:  
Pressing [ ] decreases the intensity, and pressing [ ] increases the  
intensity.  
You can also use the auto intensity. See “Print Setting Items” on page 39.  
(3) Press [Color] for color copying, or [Black] for black & white copying.  
The machine starts copying.  
Copying  
42  
Chapter 2  
Note  
z To cancel copying, press [Stop/Reset].  
z The machine can also receive faxes in copy mode (when [COPY] is pressed).  
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy  
You can reduce or enlarge copies.  
1
2
Prepare for copying.  
See “Prepare for copying.” on page 42.  
Select the reduction/enlargement method.  
The example below assumes that you will select <Zoom (25-400%)>.  
(1) Press [Settings].  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select Tab 1.  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Magnification>, and use [ ] or [ ] to select <Zoom (25-  
400%)>.  
Specify the custom copy ratio for reducing or enlarging copies.  
(3)  
Besides <Zoom (25-400%)>, you can also choose from the following reduction/  
enlargement methods.  
Same magnification: Copies in the same size as an original.  
Preset ratio:  
Preset ratios are convenient when changing between standard page sizes,  
for example, when reducing A4 to A5, or enlarging B5 to A4.  
Fit-to-page:  
You can automatically reduce or enlarge the document to fit the size of the  
paper which are loaded in the Auto Sheet Feeder or Cassette.  
Note  
When loading the document on the ADF, you cannot select <Fit-to-page>.  
(4) Press [ ] to move the cursor down, and use [ ] or [ ] to select the setting value.  
Holding down [ ] or [ ] steps through the values faster.  
Note  
When you choose <Fit-to-page>, the document size may not be detected correctly depending  
on the document. In that case, choose <Same magnification>, <Preset ratio> or <Zoom (25-  
400%)>.  
3
4
Finalize your selection.  
(1) Press [Settings].  
Return to the Copy standby screen.  
Start copying.  
See “Start copying.” on page 42.  
Copying  
Chapter 2  
43  
Note  
When specifying enlarge/reduce for two-sided copying, load the document on the Platen Glass.  
Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper  
You can copy two document pages onto the sides of a single sheet of paper, or the sides of a  
double-sided document onto either the sides of a single sheet of paper or two sheets of paper.  
z Single-sided to Two-sided  
(A)  
(B)  
(B)  
(B)  
z Two-sided to Two-sided  
(A)  
z Two-sided to Single-sided  
(A)  
(A) Long-side stapling  
(B) Short-side stapling  
1
Prepare for copying.  
(1) Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
(2) Press [Two-Sided].  
(3) Load paper.  
See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
(4) Ensure that the proper paper source is selected.  
See “Changing the Paper Source” on page 27.  
Note  
z Specify [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp is lit when feeding paper from  
the Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the Cassette.  
z You can also display the Two-sided copy screen by selecting <Two-sided copy> under the  
Special copy screen.  
2
Select the orientation of the document.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the orientation of the document, then press [OK].  
Copying  
44  
Chapter 2  
3
4
Select the binding margin.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the binding margin, then press [OK].  
Load the document.  
(1) Follow the on-screen instructions to load the document, then press [OK].  
5
6
Specify the necessary items.  
See To Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
Start copying.  
(1) Press [Color] for color copying, or [Black] for black & white copying.  
z When the document was loaded on the Platen Glass:  
(2) Load the document to be printed on the back face on the Platen Glass. If you have only  
one document to scan, press [OK].  
(3) Press [Color] or [Black]. Be sure to press the same button as you pressed in step (1).  
Important  
If you do not press the same button in step (1) and step (3), the machine does not start  
copying.  
z When the document was loaded in the ADF:  
The machine starts copying automatically after the document is scanned in.  
Note  
z This function cannot be used in conjunction with <Fit-to-page> under <Magnification> or other  
copy functions.  
z If you perform black & white copying for <Two-sided copy>, print intensity may be different from  
when performing black & white copying for single-sided copy.  
z This function can only be used when the page size is set to <8.5" x 11"> or <A4>. Two-sided to  
two-sided copying and two-sided to single-sided copying can only be performed for A4- or Letter-  
sized originals.  
z The media type is fixed to <Plain paper>. You cannot change this setting.  
z When the document is set to the ADF, the document pages are not ejected in the original order  
under the machine's default setting. If you want the document pages to eject in the original order,  
set <Two-sided output setting> to <Output by page>. See “Two-sided output setting” on page 136.  
Copying  
Chapter 2  
45  
Changing the Copy Settings  
You can change the copy settings such as the page size, media type, or print quality.  
For details on changing the copy settings and setting items, see To Change Print Settings” on  
page 37.  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
You can specify the page size.  
You can specify the media type.  
You can adjust print quality for the document to be copied.  
You can specify the reduction/enlargement method.  
See “Reducing or Enlarging a Copy” on page 43.  
5
You can specify if auto intensity is performed.  
Specifying <Auto intensity ON> automatically changes the icon above the intensity slide bar  
on the LCD to <AUTO>.  
Important  
Even while <Auto intensity ON> is selected, you can change the intensity by pressing [ ] or  
[
]. Move the cursor to the center of the slide bar to enable auto intensity again.  
Copying  
46  
Chapter 2  
Using Useful Copy Functions  
Special Copy  
You can copy in various layouts.  
1
2
Prepare for copying.  
See “Prepare for copying.” on page 42.  
Select the copy menu.  
(1) Press [Menu].  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Special copy>, then press [OK].  
The Special copy screen is displayed.  
(2)  
z Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 copy)  
This feature enables you to copy two documents (A) (B) onto a single sheet (C) of paper by  
reducing each image.  
(B)  
(C)  
(A)  
Procedure:  
(1) Display the Special copy screen.  
See “Special Copy” on page 47.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <2-on-1 copy>, then press [OK].  
(3) Follow the on-screen instructions to load the document, then press [OK].  
(4) Specify the necessary items.  
See To Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(5) Press [Color] for color copying, or [Black] for black & white copying.  
z When the document was loaded on the Platen Glass:  
(6) Load the document to be printed on the right side on the Platen Glass. If you have only  
one document to scan, press [OK].  
(7) Press [Color] or [Black]. Be sure to press the same button as you pressed in step (5).  
Copying  
Chapter 2  
47  
Important  
If you do not press the same button in step (5) and step (7), the machine does not start  
copying.  
z When the document was loaded in the ADF:  
The machine starts copying automatically after the document is scanned in.  
Note  
z This function cannot be used in conjunction with other functions.  
z If <Device memory is full.> appears on the LCD when scanning, set the print quality to  
<Standard> or <Fast> and try copying again.  
z You can use this feature only when the page size is set to <8.5" x 11"> or <A4>.  
z You cannot select <Magnification>.  
z Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 copy)  
This feature enables you to copy four documents onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each  
image. Four types layouts can be selected.  
Procedure:  
(1) Display the Special copy screen.  
See “Special Copy” on page 47.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <4-on-1 copy> and press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the layout, then press [OK].  
(4) Follow the on-screen instructions to load the document, then press [OK].  
(5) Specify the necessary items.  
See To Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(6) Press [Color] for color copying, or [Black] for black & white copying.  
z When the document was loaded on the Platen Glass:  
(7) Load the second document to print on the Platen Glass, and press the same button as  
you pressed in step (6).  
(8) Repeat step (7) until you finish loading the fourth document, then press the same button  
as you pressed in step (6). If you have only one, two or three documents to scan, press  
[OK] after loading the last document.  
Important  
If you do not press the same button in step (6), steps (7) and (8), the machine does not start  
copying.  
z When the document was loaded in the ADF:  
The machine starts copying automatically after the document is scanned in.  
Copying  
48  
Chapter 2  
Note  
z This function cannot be used in conjunction with other copy functions.  
z If <Device memory is full.> appears on the LCD when scanning, set the print quality to  
<Standard> or <Fast> and try copying again.  
z This function can be used only when page size is set to <8.5" x 11"> or <A4>.  
z You cannot specify <Magnification> for this function.  
z Creating Stickers (Sticker copy)  
This feature enables you to easily make stickers from 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4 mm photos or  
graphics using Canon sticker paper.  
(A)  
(B)  
(A) Platen Glass (place document face down)  
(B) 16 stickers  
Procedure:  
(1) Display the Special copy screen.  
See “Special Copy” on page 47.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Sticker copy>, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Stickers x 16>.  
You can only print in the Stickers x 16 layout (A) though other layouts appear on the LCD.  
Use the special sheets of stickers.  
(A)  
(4) Follow the on-screen instructions to load the document on the Platen Glass, then press  
[OK].  
(5) Specify the necessary items.  
See To Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(6) Press [Color] for color copying, or [Black] for black & white copying.  
Note  
z When using this feature, load the document on the Platen Glass.  
z Load stickers in the Auto Sheet Feeder when using this function.  
z This function cannot be used in conjunction with other copy functions.  
z You can only load one sheet of stickers at a time in the Auto Sheet Feeder when using this  
function.  
z You cannot specify the page size, media type, or <Magnification> when using this function.  
z The print quality is fixed to <High>. You cannot change this setting.  
Copying  
Chapter 2  
49  
z Copying without Borders (Borderless copy)  
This feature enables you to copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders.  
Procedure:  
(1) Display the Special copy screen.  
See “Special Copy” on page 47.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Borderless copy>, then press [OK].  
(3) Specify the necessary items.  
See To Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(4) Press [Color] or [Black] to start copying.  
Note  
z When using this feature, load the document on the Platen Glass.  
z The copied image may need to be enlarged to fit onto the selected page size when making  
borderless copies. Some cropping may occur.  
z You can use this feature only when the page size is set to <8.5" x 11">, <A4>, <4" x 6">,  
<5" x 7">, or <credit card>.  
z You can use this feature only when the paper is set to <Photo Paper Pro>, <Photo Plus>,  
<Matte Photo>, <Glossy Photo>.  
z You can specify print quality to either <Standard> or <High>.  
z You can select the width to be cropped from the borders of the original image according to  
the image size.  
z Repeating an Image on a Page (Image repeat)  
This feature enables you to copy an image multiple times onto a single page. You can set the  
machine to automatically select the number of times it repeats the image, or you can specify the  
number.  
Procedure:  
(1) Display the Special copy screen.  
See “Special Copy” on page 47.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Image repeat>, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Auto layout> or <Manual layout>.  
If you selected <Auto layout> and pressed [OK], go to step (7).  
If you selected <Manual layout> and pressed [OK], go to step (4).  
(4) Use [ ] or [ ] to set the vertical repeats.  
Copying  
50  
Chapter 2  
(5) Press [ ] to move the cursor to the right.  
(6) Use [ ] or [ ] to set the horizontal repeats, then press [OK].  
(7) Specify the necessary items.  
See To Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(8) Press [Color] for color copying, or [Black] for black & white copying.  
Important  
z The area read from the documents depends on the enlargement/reduction ratio.  
z The size of the documents to copy should be no larger than one division of the paper. For  
example, if you copy four documents at the same size, their sizes must be one-fourth of  
the page size or smaller.  
Note  
z <credit card> cannot be selected for the page size.  
z <Fit-to-page> cannot be selected for <Magnification>.  
z When selecting <AUTO> for the number of times to repeat the image, set the document on  
the Platen Glass. You cannot use the ADF.  
z Making Multiple Copies of an Entire Document (Collation)  
When making multiple copies of a document with more than one page you have them delivered  
in sorted sets.  
(B)  
(D)  
(E)  
(F)  
(A)  
(C)  
(D)  
(E)  
(F)  
(A) Documents  
(B) Select <Collated copy>  
(C) Not Select <Collated copy>  
(D) Copy 1  
(E) Copy 2  
(F) Copy 3  
Procedure:  
(1) Display the Special copy screen.  
See “Special Copy” on page 47.  
Copying  
Chapter 2  
51  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Collated copy>, then press [OK].  
(3) Specify the necessary items.  
See To Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(4) Press [Color] for color copying, or [Black] for black & white copying.  
Note  
z This function cannot be used in conjunction with other copy functions.  
z Load the document in the ADF when using this function.  
z Using this function might cause a reduction in print quality. For best results, print without  
using collation.  
z The number of pages the machine can read varies with the document. If <Device memory  
is full.> appears on the LCD when scanning, reduce the number of document pages to  
scan and try copying again.  
z Copying with Fade Restoration (Fade-restored copy)  
This function helps to correct the color when copying documents that have faded over time.  
Procedure:  
(1) Display the Special copy screen.  
See “Special Copy” on page 47.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Fade-restored copy>, then press [OK].  
(3) Specify the necessary items.  
See To Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(4) Press [Color] to start copying.  
Note  
z When using this feature, load the document on the Platen Glass.  
z This function can only be used when the page size is set to <8.5" x 11">, <A4>, <4" x 6">,  
<5" x 7">, or <credit card>.  
z You can use this feature only when the paper is set to <Photo Paper Pro>, <Photo Plus>,  
<Matte Photo>, <Glossy Photo>.  
z You can specify print quality to either <Standard> or <High>.  
z Neither magnification or intensity can be specified.  
z Fade Restoration is not guaranteed to be effective with any photograph.  
z <Fade-restored copy> is only available when making color copies.  
Copying  
52  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Using the Memory Card  
This section describes the compatible memory cards and how to insert and remove them.  
Memory Cards Supported by This Machine  
The following memory cards are compatible with this machine.  
Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the Card Slot:  
z Compact Flash (CF) Card  
Supports Type I/II (3.3V)  
z Microdrive  
z SmartMedia  
Supports 3.3V card only  
1MB and 2MB cards are not supported  
z MEMORY STICK  
z MEMORY STICK PRO  
z SD Secure Digital memory card  
z MultiMedia Card  
Memory cards that can be inserted in the Card Slot using the adapter:  
*1  
xD-Picture Card  
*2  
z MEMORY STICK Duo  
*2  
z MEMORY STICK PRO Duo  
2
miniSD Card*  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
53  
*1 Requires purchase of a separate compact flash card adapter for xD-Picture cards.  
*2 Use the special adapter provided with the card.  
Important  
z This machine supports image data created by DCF standard digital cameras (based on  
Exif), and DPOF (based on Ver 1.00).  
z Image data taken or saved on memory cards that do not guarantee the action with the  
digital camera might be unreadable from the machine or the image data might be  
damaged. For details on memory cards guarantee the action with the digital camera, refer  
to the manuals supplied with your digital camera.  
z Format the memory card with a digital camera. The memory card might not be usable with  
the machine if formatted on a computer.  
z Images edited on a computer may not be printed correctly.  
z Do not insert more than one memory cards at a time.  
Inserting the Memory Card  
Note  
z When <Read/write mode> is selected in Read/write attribute under Other settings by using  
the Operation Panel on the machine, card direct printing cannot be done. After using the  
Card Slot as the memory card drive of the computer, remove the memory card, then be  
sure to set Read/write attribute to <Read-only mode>. See “Read/write attribute” on  
page 140.  
z When you have edited or processed the data on a memory card on a computer, be sure to  
print the data from the computer. If you print using the Operation Panel, the data might not  
be printed correctly.  
1
2
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Open the Card Slot Cover.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
54  
Chapter 3  
3
Insert a memory card into the Card Slot.  
Card Type  
Inserting Card  
z Compact Flash (CF) card  
z Microdrive  
z xD-Picture card*  
(A)  
Insert into the Card Slot on the left side.  
The Access Lamp (A) lights up.  
z SmartMedia  
(A)  
Insert into the Card Slot on the right side.  
The Access Lamp (A) lights up.  
z MEMORY STICK  
z MEMORY STICK PRO  
z MEMORY STICK Duo*  
z MEMORY STICK PRO Duo*  
z SD Secure Digital memory card  
z miniSD Card*  
z MultiMedia card  
(A)  
Insert into the center part of the Card Slot on the right side.  
The Access Lamp (A) lights up.  
* Be sure to attach the memory card to the special adapter before inserting it into the Card  
Slot.  
4
5
Ensure that the Access Lamp is lit.  
Caution  
z The memory card sticks out of the Card Slot, but do not force it into the slot any further.  
Doing so damages the machine and the memory card.  
z Check if the right side of the memory card is facing to the right. If you force the memory  
card with the wrong direction into the Card Slot, the machine and/or the memory card may  
be damaged.  
z While the Access Lamp is flashing, do not remove the memory card or the card adapter  
containing the memory card, nor turn off the machine, as this might damage the data on  
the memory card.  
Close the Card Slot Cover.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
55  
Removing the Memory Card  
Note  
If you use the Card Slot as a memory card drive for your computer, removing operation from  
the computer is required before removing the memory card.  
z When Windows is being used, right-click the removable disk icon and click [Eject]. If [Eject]  
is not displayed on the screen, ensure that the Access Lamp is not flashing and remove  
the memory card.  
z When Macintosh is being used, be sure to drag the  
icon into the Trash.  
1
2
Open the Card Slot Cover.  
Ensure that the Access Lamp is not flashing, then remove the memory card.  
Important  
Removing the memory card or turning off the machine while the Access Lamp is flashing can  
damage the data stored in the memory card.  
3
Close the Card Slot Cover.  
Printing Photograph  
Let’s select a photo from the photos stored on the memory card of the digital camera, and print it.  
Printing Photo Displayed on the LCD (Single-photo print)  
Print a photo saved on the memory card.  
1
Prepare for printing.  
(1) Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
(2) Load paper.  
See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
(3) Ensure that the proper paper source is selected.  
See “Changing the Paper Source” on page 27.  
Note  
Specify [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the Cassette.  
(4) Insert a memory card into the Card Slot.  
See “Inserting the Memory Card” on page 54.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
56  
Chapter 3  
2
Select the print menu.  
(1) Press [MEMORY CARD].  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Single-photo print>, then press [OK].  
The photo selection screen is displayed.  
Note  
may be displayed on the LCD while reading the photo.  
(2)  
3
Select the photo you want to print.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to display the photo you want to print.  
(2) Press [Color].  
The print confirmation screen is displayed.  
Note  
Displaying Photos Automatically on the LCD (Slide Show)  
You can automatically display photos in sequence when selecting <Single-photo print>.  
z To start the slide show, press [OK] when checking photos in <Single-photo print>.  
z To stop the slide show, press [Stop/Reset] during the slide show.  
You can do...  
z To search for photos with the shooting date (Search), see “Searching for Photos with the  
Shooting Date (Search)” on page 59.  
z To print a specified area (Trimming), see “Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)” on  
page 60.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
57  
4
Start printing.  
(1) Check the page size and media type.  
Note  
Press [Settings] to check or change the page size, media type, or other settings. See To  
Change Print Settings” on page 37.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ], or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of prints.  
(2)  
(1)  
(3) Press [Color].  
The machine starts printing.  
Note  
z To cancel printing, press [Stop/Reset].  
z The printing is not started if you press [Black].  
Specifying How Many Copies to Print for Each Photo (Multi-photo print)  
You can specify the number of prints to be made for each photo.  
1
2
Prepare for printing.  
See “Prepare for printing.” on page 56.  
Select the print menu.  
(1) Press [MEMORY CARD].  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Multi-photo print>, then press [OK].  
The photo selection screen is displayed.  
3
Specify the number of prints for each photo.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the image you want to print.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ], or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of prints.  
(2)  
(3) Repeat from step (1) to step (2) to specify the number of prints for each photo.  
(4) Press [OK].  
The print confirmation screen is displayed.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
58  
Chapter 3  
Note  
You can do...  
z To search for photos with the shooting date (Search), see “Searching for Photos with the  
Shooting Date (Search)” on page 59.  
z To print a specified area (Trimming), see “Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)” on  
page 60.  
4
Start printing.  
(1) Confirm the settings.  
To change any of the settings, press [Settings].  
See “Changing the Print Settings” on page 37.  
(2) Press [Color].  
The specified number of copies of each photo will be printed.  
Note  
z To cancel printing, press [Stop/Reset].  
z The printing is not started if you press [Black].  
Other Useful Functions  
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)  
When there are a lot of photos saved on the memory card, you can choose to display and print  
only photos shot on the specified date or within the specified range of dates.  
Note  
z By pressing [Search] to specify a date or date range, you can display and print the photos  
shot on the specified date or within the specified date range in <Single-photo print> or  
<Multi-photo print>, <Layout print>, <Sticker print>, or <Captured info>(<Single photo>).  
z If the number of prints to make is already specified for some photos before searching with  
the shooting date, or if some photos are already pasted on a layout, those photos will still  
be selected for printing even if they were not shot on the specified date or within the  
specified date range.  
z When using <Print all photos>, <Photo index print> or <Captured info>(<List>), only the  
photos shot on the specified date or within the specified date range can be printed.  
1
Set the search method.  
(1) Press [Search].  
The Search method screen is displayed.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the search method.  
If you want to specify only one date for search, select <One date only>.  
If you want to specify the date range for search, select <Select date range>.  
(3) Press [OK].  
The date input screen is displayed.  
Note  
It may take a while for the date input screen to be displayed depending on the number of  
photos saved on the memory card.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
59  
2
Specify the date range.  
z If you selected <One date only>:  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the date to search for.  
(2) Go to main step 3.  
z If you selected <Select date range>:  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the date of the oldest photos you want to print, then press  
[OK].  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the date of the most recent photos you want to print.  
(3) Go to main step 3.  
3
Start searching.  
(1) Press [OK].  
The machine starts searching and the photos within the specified date range are  
displayed.  
Note  
z The date to be specified is displayed according to the settings of <Date display> under  
<FAX settings>. See “Fax Settings” on page 136.  
z To exit Search mode, select <Cancel search> from the Search method screen, and then  
press [OK]. You can also exit Search mode by switching to any mode other than Memory  
card mode.  
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)  
You can edit images displayed on the LCD by cropping them.  
Note  
Crop images after specifying the page size, media type, and bordered or borderless printing  
in the Settings (Memory Card). If you change the paper settings after cropping, the cropped  
area may be adjusted to match the paper, or be disabled completely.  
1
2
Select the photo you want to crop.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the photo you want to crop.  
Display the trimming edit screen.  
(1) Press [Trimming].  
The trimming edit screen is displayed.  
3
Choose the area you want to print.  
(1) Use [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to position the cropping frame, then press [Trimming].  
If you do not rotate or resize the cropping frame, go to main step 4.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
60  
Chapter 3  
(2) Use [ ] to enlarge or [ ] to reduce the cropping frame size, respectively.  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to switch the cropping frame between portrait and landscape.  
4
Finalize your selection of trimming area.  
(1) Press [OK].  
The area to be cropped is specified, and the original photo is displayed.  
Note  
z The cropped image cannot be newly saved on the memory card.  
z The trimming area is displayed only for photos which have been trimmed.  
z To change the trimming area once it has been set, press [Trimming] again.  
z To cancel trimming while editing the trimming frame, press [Stop/Reset] while the trimming  
edit screen is displayed. You can also cancel trimming by switching to any mode other than  
Memory card mode.  
z To cancel trimming after trimming has been set, press [Trimming] and then press [Stop/  
Reset].  
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout print)  
You can print the specified photos in the specified layout.  
1
2
Prepare for printing.  
See “Prepare for printing.” on page 56.  
Select the print menu.  
(1) Press [MEMORY CARD].  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Special photo print>, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Layout print>, then press [OK].  
3
Specify the layout.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the layout, then press [OK].  
The following layouts can be selected.  
Bordered:  
Borderless:  
Album:  
x2/x4/x8, Half, Half (w/line)  
x2/x4/x8, Half, Half (w/line)  
Album (4/right), Album (4/left)  
Mixed 1, Mixed 2, Mixed 3  
Mixed:  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
61  
Note  
z When you select Borderless, the media type cannot be set to <Plain paper>.  
z You can select Mixed 1-3 only when the page size is set to <8.5" x 11"> or <A4>.  
4
5
Specify the paste method.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the pasting method.  
If you select <Paste all> then press [OK], all photos saved on the memory card are  
automatically pasted in the specified layout. Go to step 6.  
If you select <Paste one by one> then press [OK], the photo selection screen is  
displayed.  
Paste photos one by one.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to display the photo to be pasted, then press [OK].  
Note  
You can do...  
z To search for photos with the shooting date (Search), see “Searching for Photos with the  
Shooting Date (Search)” on page 59.  
z To print a specified area (Trimming), see “Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)” on  
page 60.  
(2) Repeat step (1) to paste photos.  
Press [Back] to cancel the last pasted photo.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to cancel all pasted photos.  
(3) Press [Color] after pasting all photos.  
The print confirmation screen is displayed.  
Note  
Pasting cannot be done over multiple pages. When you finish pasting photos for one page,  
print the page.  
6
Start printing.  
See “Start printing.” on page 58.  
Printing on the Sticker (Sticker Print)  
You can print your favorite photo with a frame on Canon Photo Stickers.  
1
2
Prepare for printing.  
See “Prepare for printing.” on page 56.  
Note  
z When you use this function, load paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
z You can only load one sheet of stickers at a time in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
Select the print menu.  
(1) Press [MEMORY CARD].  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Special photo print>, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Sticker print>, then press [OK].  
Printing from a Memory Card  
62  
Chapter 3  
3
4
Select the layout for the sticker you want to print.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Stickers x 16>.  
You can only print in the Stickers x 16 layout though other layouts appear on the LCD.  
(2) Press [OK].  
The photo selection screen is displayed.  
Select the photo you want to print.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to display the photo to print, then press [OK].  
The frame selection screen is displayed.  
Note  
You can do...  
z To search for photos with the shooting date (Search), see “Searching for Photos with the  
Shooting Date (Search)” on page 59.  
z To print a specified area (Trimming), see “Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)” on  
page 60.  
5
Select the frame.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the frame, then press [OK].  
The print confirmation screen is displayed.  
Note  
z If you do not select a frame using [ ] or [ ], the photo is printed without any frame.  
When you want to print with no frame, just press [OK].  
z When the photo is upside down, use [ ] or [ ] to rotate it by 180 degrees to orient it  
properly against the frame.  
z If you want to rotate the photo by 90 degrees to fit it within the frame, use the trimming edit  
screen to rotate the cropping area. See “Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)” on page 60.  
6
Start printing.  
See “Start printing.” on page 58.  
Note  
Settings cannot be changed when printing stickers.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
63  
Other Printing Functions  
The following print functions are also provided under the Special photo print menu.  
z <Print all photos>  
You can print all photos saved on the memory card.  
z <Photo index print>  
You can print a list of all the photos saved on a memory card.  
Note  
The following print methods are available:  
<Standard>:  
The number of photos printed on a single sheet of paper depends on the size of the  
medium.  
– Letter / A4: 80 photos  
– 5" x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8 mm: 35 photos  
– 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4 mm: 24 photos  
– Credit Card: 6 photos  
<Contact print>:  
35 mm film images are printed in its negative size as in contact print.  
z <DPOF print>  
If you have specified Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) settings on your digital camera, you can  
print using these settings.  
Note  
z The machine supports the following DPOF functions:  
Supported image formats:  
CIFF, Exif and JFIF  
Print Style Standard Print:  
Prints photos that were specified as “Standard Print” with DPOF  
Print Style Index Print:  
Prints an index of photos that were specified as “Index Print” with DPOF using the  
machine’s index printing layout (<Standard>)  
Print Photo Select:  
Prints only photos specified with DPOF (cannot be specified from the Operation Panel)  
Number of copies:  
Prints the number of copies specified with DPOF (cannot be specified from the Operation  
Panel)  
Functions other than the above (adding captions or titles, cropping, image rotation, etc.)  
are not supported.  
z Prints are automatically enlarged or reduced to match the page size. Edges of the photo  
may be clipped off depending on the page size.  
z The shot date order setting by which photos are sorted follows that of DPOF.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
64  
Chapter 3  
z <Captured info>  
Information on photographs at the time of its shooting (Exif info) can be printed in the margin of  
Photo index print or selected individual photos.  
Note  
The following print methods are available:  
<List>:  
Prints the information in the margin of Photo index print of all photos.  
<Single photo>:  
Prints the information in the margin of selected individual photos.  
1
2
Prepare for printing.  
See “Prepare for printing.” on page 56.  
Select the print menu.  
(1) Press [MEMORY CARD].  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Special photo print>, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the print menu, then press [OK].  
Note  
z In <Photo index print> and <Captured info>, the print method selection screen is displayed.  
Use [ ] or [ ] to select the print method, then press [OK].  
z If you selected <Single photo> for <Captured info>, the photo selection screen is  
displayed.  
Use [ ] or [ ] to select the photos to print, then press [OK].  
You can do...  
z To search for photos with the shooting date (Search), see “Searching for Photos with the  
Shooting Date (Search)” on page 59.  
z To print a specified area (Trimming), see “Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)” on  
page 60.  
3
Start printing.  
See “Start printing.” on page 58.  
Note  
z For the <Print all photos>, all photos saved on the memory card will be printed.  
z For the <Photo index print>, an index of all photos saved on the memory card will be  
printed.  
z You cannot configure the number of prints when using <DPOF print>.  
z For the <DPOF print>, the photos will be printed according to the DPOF information on the  
memory card.  
z When using <Captured info>, information on photographs are printed in the margin of  
Photo index print or selected individual photos.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
65  
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet  
With this machine, you can easily select print options as well as the photos to print using the  
Photo Index Sheet and by marking its appropriate circles. Simply scanning the Photo Index  
Sheet prints the selected photographs according to the settings you have made.  
1
Prepare for printing.  
(1) Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
(2) Load A4 or Letter-size paper.  
See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
Note  
Use white plain paper when printing a Photo Index Sheet.  
(3) Ensure that the proper paper source is selected.  
See “Changing the Paper Source” on page 27.  
Note  
Specify [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the Cassette.  
(4) Insert a memory card into the Card Slot.  
See “Inserting the Memory Card” on page 54.  
2
Select the Photo Index Sheet menu.  
(1) Press [Photo Index Sheet].  
The Photo Index Sheet menu is displayed.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Photo Index Sheet print>, then press [OK].  
3
Select a range of image data to print.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select a range of images you want to include in the Photo Index  
Sheet, then press [OK].  
<Print all photos>:  
<Set no. of copies>:  
<Search>:  
All images are printed on the Photo Index Sheet.  
Prints by specifying the number of photos.  
Prints by specifying the date range.  
z If you selected <Print all photos>:  
(2) Go to step 4.  
z If you selected <Set no. of copies>:  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the number of photos to print starting with the newest one, then  
press [OK].  
(3) Go to step 4.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
66  
Chapter 3  
z If you selected <Search>:  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the oldest shot date to include in print, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the newest shot date to include in print, then press [OK].  
(4) Go to step 4.  
Note  
It may take time to display the Search screen depending on the number of photos saved on  
the memory card.  
4
Start printing the Photo Index Sheet.  
(1) Press [Color].  
Printing of the Photo Index Sheet starts.  
Note  
When there are more than 37 images, two or more Photo Index Sheets are printed.  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(D)  
(E)  
(F)  
(G)  
(A) Select the page size and print type.  
(B) Select date printing and/or photo optimizer as necessary. See “Print Setting Items” on  
page 39.  
(C) Mark this to print all photographs, one copy each.  
*When you mark this, even if you mark the number of copies you want to print for each  
photograph, those marks will be disregarded, and one copy each of all photographs will be  
printed.  
(D) Select the number of copies (fill in a circle under each photograph you want to print).  
(E) Follow the procedure as described.  
(F) Select the paper source.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
67  
(G) Mark this to print the same Photo Index Sheet again.  
*If you mark this, all other marked settings will be disregarded.  
5
Fill in the appropriate circles in the Photo Index Sheet.  
Fill in the appropriate circles (  
print and their print options.  
) with a dark pencil or a black ink pen to select the photos to  
z Good  
z Bad  
(B)  
(C)  
(A)  
(A) Check mark  
(B) Line only  
(C) Too light  
Important  
z Be sure to fill a circle for every setting item (except options).  
z If there is more than one Photo Index Sheet, fill in all the sheets.  
z If the filled circles on the Photo Index Sheet are not dark enough, the machine may not  
read the settings.  
6
Scan the Photo Index Sheet and print photos.  
(1) Load the paper you selected for the Photo Index Sheet.  
See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
Note  
z When printing images using the Photo Index Sheet, you can select 4" x 6" (101.6 x 152.4  
mm), 5" x 7" (127 x 177.8 mm), 8.5" x 11" (LETTER), or A4 for the page size.  
z Load paper in the location you selected under <The Paper Feeder> on the Photo Index  
Sheet.  
(2) Press [Photo Index Sheet].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Scan sheet and print>, then press [OK].  
(4) Place the Photo Index Sheet on the Platen Glass, then press [OK].  
When placing the Photo Index Sheet, place the front side down, and align the upper left  
corner of the sheet precisely with the arrow mark (alignment mark) at the upper left  
corner of the Platen Glass.  
The Photo Index Sheet is scanned and the specified photos will be printed.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
68  
Chapter 3  
Important  
z Photo Index Sheet cannot be scanned from the ADF.  
z If <Failed to scan Photo Index Sheet.> is displayed on the LCD, press [OK]. Make sure that  
you have marked all the necessary circles on the sheet, and confirm its orientation and  
position when it is set on the Platen Glass for scanning.  
z If the filled circles on the Photo Index Sheet are not marked dark enough, the machine may  
not read the settings.  
z Do not remove the memory card while the machine is printing.  
z If the Platen Glass is dirty, the machine may not read the settings. See “Cleaning the  
Platen Glass and Document Cover” on page 155.  
z If the Photo Index Sheet is dirty, the machine may not read the settings.  
Note  
z To cancel printing, press [Stop/Reset].  
z To continue to print photographs using subsequent Photo Index Sheets, repeat the  
procedure from step 5.  
z If the memory card has been removed and then reinserted before printing with the Photo  
Index Sheet, it may take some time before printing starts.  
Printing from a Memory Card  
Chapter 3  
69  
Chapter 4  
Printing Photographs Directly from a  
Compliant Device  
Connecting a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera, camcorder or mobile phone to  
the machine allows you to print recorded images directly without using a computer.  
Note  
z PictBridge is an industry standard enabling a range of digital photo solutions, including the direct  
printing of photos from a digital still camera, camcorder or mobile phone* without the need to use  
a computer.  
z It is possible to specify which images to print and various print settings from the operation panel of  
your camera or mobile phone.  
z Canon Bubble Jet Direct allows you to print photos from a Canon Bubble Jet Direct compatible  
(PictBridge incompatible) digital camera or digital video camcorder without a computer, by simply  
connecting the digital camera or digital video camcorder to this machine.  
For details, see “Printing Photographs Directly from a Canon Bubble Jet Direct Compatible Digital  
Camera” on page 76.  
* Hereafter, the digital still camera, digital camcorder, and camera-equipped mobile phone  
compatible with PictBridge are collectively called a PictBridge compliant device.  
(A)  
(B)  
(A) This mark indicates that the product is PictBridge-compatible. See “Printing Photographs  
Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device” on page 73.  
(B) See “Printing Photographs Directly from a Canon Bubble Jet Direct Compatible Digital  
Camera” on page 76.  
Connecting to a PictBridge Compliant Device  
To connect a PictBridge compliant device to this machine, use the USB cable supplied with the  
device.  
Caution  
Do not connect any equipment other than PictBridge compliant devices or Canon Bubble Jet Direct  
compatible digital cameras to the Direct Print Port of the machine. If you do so, electric shock, fire, or  
damage to the device could result.  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
70  
Chapter 4  
Important  
Do not connect PictBridge compliant devices or Canon Bubble Jet Direct compatible digital cameras  
to the machine while copying, scanning, faxing or printing is in progress.  
Note  
When printing photos with the digital device connected to the machine, it is advisable to use the AC  
adapter supplied with the device. If you use the device battery, be sure to charge it fully.  
1
Set up the machine.  
Refer to the Easy Setup Instructions to set up the machine and make it ready for printing.  
Note  
The Print Head cannot be aligned using the controls of the digital device. If the Print Head  
alignment is not yet performed, execute automatic Print Head alignment, see “Aligning Print  
Head automatically” on page 153.  
2
3
4
Turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Load the paper in the machine.  
See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
Connect the PictBridge compliant device to the machine.  
Note  
Depending on the model or brand of your device, you may have to select a print mode  
compliant with PictBridge before connecting the device.  
You may also have to turn on the device or select Play mode manually after connecting the  
device to the machine.  
Perform necessary operations according to the instruction manual supplied with the  
PictBridge compliant device.  
(1) Ensure that the device is turned off.  
(2) Connect the device to the machine using the USB cable (for connection to a computer)  
supplied with the device.  
Note  
Some types of the PictBridge compliant devices do not turn on automatically, when connected  
to the machine. If the device does not turn on automatically, turn it on manually.  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
Chapter 4  
71  
(3) Turn on and set up the device for direct printing.  
Either of the following icons will display on the LCD display of the device when the  
machine is correctly connected.  
A PictBridge compliant device.  
A Canon Bubble Jet Direct compatible digital camera.  
Note  
If neither of these icons appear, see “Cannot Print Properly from the Digital Camera” on  
page 179.  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
72  
Chapter 4  
Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge  
Compliant Device  
When operating the device, be sure to follow the instructions given in the instruction manual supplied  
with the PictBridge compliant device. Let’s take a look at the page size, media type, layout, image  
optimization modes, and date/file no. printing that can be set on a PictBridge compliant device  
connected to the machine.  
Checking or Changing PictBridge Print Settings from Your Camera  
To change the page size or media type operate the device to select the PictBridge print setup  
mode and confirm or change the settings.  
The settings below can be changed by pressing [Settings] in Memory card mode of this machine  
when a PictBridge compliant device is connected. However, changes can be made on the  
Settings screen (Memory Card) only when the corresponding items below are in the “Default”  
setting items (selections based on the machine setting) using the controls of the device.  
PictBridge compliant device  
setting items  
Machine setting on the Print Setting screen  
Paper size : Default  
Paper type : Default  
Layout : Default  
You can change the machine settings of (1), (2), and (4)  
on tab 1 in Memory card mode.  
For the setting items, see “Memory card mode” on  
page 40.  
Image optimize : Default  
You can change the machine settings on tab 2 in Memory  
card mode.  
For the setting items, see “Memory card mode” on  
page 40.  
About the Settings Explained below  
The settings explained on the following pages cannot be made on some PictBridge compliant  
devices. If any setting cannot be made, the machine setting is used.  
* Names of settings that are displayed on Canon PictBridge compliant device are used in the  
description given below. Different names may be displayed on the PictBridge compliant device  
depending on the brand or model.  
About Image Data Format for Printing  
This machine accepts images* taken with a camera compatible with the Design rule for Camera  
File System and PNG files.  
* Exif2.21 compliant  
About “Paper size” and “Paper type”  
When the “Default” (selections based on the machine setting) is selected, the machine operates  
based on the <Page size> and the <Media type> settings specified in the Memory card mode of  
the machine.  
The following sizes and types of paper can be loaded in the machine by selecting options from  
“Paper size” and “Paper type”.  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
Chapter 4  
73  
“Paper size” setting  
“Paper type” setting  
Paper loaded in machine  
10 x 15 cm/4" x 6"  
Photo  
Photo Paper Plus Glossy  
Fast Photo  
Photo  
Photo Paper Pro  
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss  
Glossy Photo Paper  
Photo  
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday  
Use"  
Photo Stickers*1  
13 x 18 cm/5" x 7"*2  
Photo  
Photo Paper Plus Glossy  
Photo Paper Plus Glossy  
Photo Paper Pro  
A4/8.5" x 11" (Letter)*3, *4  
Photo  
Fast Photo  
Photo  
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss  
Glossy Photo Paper  
Photo  
A4  
Photo  
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday  
Use"  
5.4 x 8.6 cm/Credit Card  
Photo  
Glossy Photo Paper  
You may not be able to purchase some Canon branded paper depending on your country.  
*1 This paper is exclusively used to print photo stickers. When printing on sticker paper, select 10  
x 15 cm / 4" x 6" in “Paper size”.  
*2 This size can be selected only for Canon PictBridge compatible devices (note that it cannot be  
selected for some models).  
*3 “Plain Paper” can be selected for “Paper type” when A4 or 8.5" x 11" (Letter) is selected for  
“Paper size”. When “Plain Paper” is selected for “Paper type”, bordered printing will be  
performed even when “Borderless” is selected for “Layout”.  
*4 When A4 or 8.5" x 11" (Letter) is selected for “Paper size”, you can print in 4-up layout.  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
74  
Chapter 4  
About “Layout” and “Trimming”  
For “Layout”, when the “Default” (selections based on the machine setting) is selected, the  
machine operates based on the print setting specified in the Memory card mode of the machine.  
Trimming is performed based on settings on the PictBridge compliant device.  
Note  
z When printing onto Photo Stickers (PS-101) (16-up), use the following settings.  
1. Select the Auto Sheet Feeder as the paper source.  
For details, see “Loading the Print Media in the Auto Sheet Feeder” on page 27.  
Always load Photo Stickers (PS-101) in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
2. Select 10 x 15 cm / 4" x 6" for the “Paper size”, and “Photo” for the “Paper type”.  
3. Select N-up for layout, then select 16-up.  
z Some PictBridge compliant devices display the Layout option; 2-up, 4-up, 9-up, and 16-up.  
In this case always select 16-up.  
z If there are no options on the PictBridge compliant device that correspond to 16-up,  
printing on stickers is not possible.  
z When you using Photo Stickers (PS-101), do not set “Borderless” in “Layout” settings.  
About “Image optimize”  
When the “Default” (selections based on the machine setting) is selected, the machine operates  
based on the tab 2 of the print setting specified in Memory card mode of the machine. For the  
setting items, see “Print Setting Items” on page 39.  
If you use a Canon PictBridge compatible device, you can select “VIVID”, “NR”, “VIVID+NR”, or  
“Face”. (Note that these options cannot be selected for some models.)  
Note  
z When “VIVID” is selected, green and blue portions of photos are printed vividly.  
z When “NR” (Noise Reduction) is selected, noise in blue portions, such as the sky, and dark  
portions is removed.  
z When “VIVID+NR” is selected, functions of both “VIVID” and “NR” are performed.  
z When “Face” is selected, backlit images are corrected when printed.  
About “Date/File No. print”  
You cannot change this setting on this machine.  
Selections of this setting will be based on that of the PictBridge compliant device.  
If you select an image which has had the shooting date embedded in it using a camera with the  
print mode, select “Off” for this function. If you select “Date”, “File No.”, or “Both”, the date and/or  
file number will be printed over the embedded date.  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
Chapter 4  
75  
Other Settings  
If you use a Canon PictBridge-compliant device, you can use the following print settings.  
(Note that these print settings cannot be used for some models.) For details, refer to your  
device’s instruction manual.  
z Shooting Info (Exif Data)  
You can print shooting Info (Exif Data) on photos in list format, or in the margins of specified  
photos.  
Select Layout, then select the item displayed with the [i] icon.  
z 35mm Film Style Layout (Contact Printing Layout)  
You can print selected photos or index-specified photos in 35 mm film style layout (contact  
printing layout).  
Select Layout, then select the item displayed with the film icon.  
Note  
z Never disconnect the USB cable during printing.  
z When disconnecting the USB cable between the PictBridge compliant device and  
machine, follow the instructions given in the device’s instruction manual.  
z Controls of the device cannot be used for the following:  
– Print quality setting  
– Machine maintenance  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Canon Bubble  
Jet Direct Compatible Digital Camera  
The following is a list of media types that can be set on the Canon Bubble Jet Direct compatible  
digital camera or digital video camcorder (PictBridge incompatible) along with their limitations when  
connected to this machine.  
Note  
To connect the compatible digital camera to this machine, use the USB cable for the computer  
connection supplied with the camera.  
For details on connection, see “Connecting to a PictBridge Compliant Device” on page 70.  
Media Types for Digital Camera  
When you connect a digital camera, you can use the following media:  
Digital Camera Setting  
Card #1  
Media Type  
Photo Paper Pro 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4 mm  
Card #2  
Photo Paper Plus Glossy 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4 mm  
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4 mm  
Glossy Photo Paper 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4 mm  
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" 4" x 6" /101.6 x 152.4  
mm  
Card #3  
Photo Paper Plus Glossy 5" x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8 mm  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
76  
Chapter 4  
Digital Camera Setting  
LTR  
Media Type  
Photo Paper Pro Letter  
Photo Paper Plus Glossy Letter  
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss Letter  
Glossy Photo Paper Letter  
A4  
Photo Paper Pro A4  
Photo Paper Plus Glossy A4  
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss A4  
Glossy Photo Paper A4  
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" A4  
You may not be able to purchase some Canon branded paper depending on your country.  
Printing Directly from a Digital Camera or a Digital Video Camcorder  
This section describes how to print after connecting a camera to the machine.  
Note  
z For the digital camera operation method and troubleshooting, refer to your digital camera  
manual.  
z For print error messages, see “Cannot Print Properly from the Digital Camera” on  
page 179.  
1
Display the image you want to print in replay mode.  
z If the camera will not change to replay mode, refer to the manual supplied with your digital  
camera for instructions how to.  
z When the digital camera is correctly connected, the icon  
digital camera.  
will display on the LCD of the  
2
3
Press [SET] on the digital camera.  
The print setting menu is displayed on the LCD of the digital camera.  
Select [Style] and specify the page size, bordered or borderless printing, and date  
printing ON or OFF.  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
Chapter 4  
77  
4
Specify the number of copies, select [Print], and then press [SET] on the digital  
camera.  
Note  
z By operating the digital camera, you can make the following prints:  
– You can make a standard print from the image displayed in the single display mode or in  
the index display mode.  
– You can print specified numbers of images, or make an index print by editing the DPOF.  
* Images other than Exif may not be index printed.  
– For the images taken with an ExifPrint compatible digital camera, the ExifPrint function  
can be used.  
– If date printing is set from the digital camera, the date when the photograph was taken is  
to be printed (excluding the index print).  
– Images will be scaled automatically according to the image size set on the digital camera  
and the size of the media set on the machine.  
z The digital camera does not support the following functions:  
– Print quality setting  
– Machine maintenance  
z To disconnect the USB cable connecting the digital camera to the machine, follow the  
procedure below:  
1. Disconnect the USB cable from the machine.  
2. Turn OFF the digital camera.  
3. Disconnect the USB cable from the digital camera.  
When disconnecting the USB cable, be sure to hold the connector by its sides.  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device  
78  
Chapter 4  
Chapter 5  
Faxing  
Preparing Your Machine for Fax  
Methods of Registering Information in Your Machine  
You can set the sending and receiving settings from the Operation Panel of the machine.  
Examples of Connecting the Machine  
Typical examples of connecting the machine are described below. The machine cannot send/  
receive faxes if the connection is incorrect. Connect the machine correctly.  
z Connecting to the Telephone Line  
z Connecting to an Analog Line  
(A)  
(A) Telephone line (analog)  
z Connecting to an ADSL  
(C)  
(B)  
(E)  
(D)  
(B) Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line  
(C) Splitter  
(D) ADSL modem (splitter may be built-in to the modem)  
(E) Computer  
For details on ADSL connection and settings, see the manual supplied with your ADSL  
modem. The illustrated connection is an example and is not guaranteed to suit every  
connecting condition.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
79  
z Connecting to an ISDN Line  
(F)  
(H)  
(G)  
(I)  
(F) ISDN line  
(G) Terminal adapter, etc.  
(H) Analog port  
(I) Computer  
For details on ISDN connection and settings, see the manuals supplied with your terminal  
adapter or dial-up router.  
z Connecting External Devices  
z Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine via a Computer  
(K)  
(J)  
(J) Computer  
(K) Telephone or Answering machine  
z Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine Directly  
(M)  
(L)  
(L) Telephone  
(M) Answering machine  
For Users In The UK  
If the connector of the external device cannot be connected to the jack on the machine, you will  
need to purchase a B.T. adapter to connect as follows:  
Connect the external device line to the B.T. adapter, then connect the B.T. adapter to the  
jack.  
Faxing  
80  
Chapter 5  
Setting the Telephone Line Type  
Before using your machine, make sure you set the correct telephone line type for your telephone  
line. If you are unsure of your telephone line type, contact your telephone company. For ISDN  
(Integrated Services Digital Network) or ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line)  
connections, contact the telephone company or service provider to confirm your line type.  
Note  
You can print the User’s data list to check the current setting. See “Printing the User’s Data  
List” on page 105.  
1
2
Display the FAX menu.  
(1) Press [FAX], then press [Menu].  
The Fax menu is displayed.  
Display the Device settings screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Maintenance/settings>, then press [OK].  
The Maintenance/settings screen is displayed.  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Device settings>, then press [OK].  
The Device settings screen is displayed.  
(2)  
3
Display the User settings screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Fax settings>, then press [OK].  
The Fax settings screen is displayed.  
(1)  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
81  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <User settings>, then press [OK].  
The User settings screen is displayed.  
(2)  
4
5
Display the Telephone line type screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Telephone line type>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
Select the telephone line type.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the telephone line type, then press [OK].  
(1)  
– <Rotary pulse>:  
Suitable for pulse dialing.  
– <Touch tone>:  
Suitable for tone dialing.  
Note  
In New Zealand, select <Touch tone>. You cannot use <Rotary pulse>.  
Faxing  
82  
Chapter 5  
Registering Sender Information  
You can register sender information (Transmit Terminal Identification (TTI)) in your machine so  
that your name or company name, your fax/telephone number, and the date and time of  
transmission are printed in small type at the top of each page to be received. Thus, whenever  
you send a fax from this machine, the recipient receiving the fax knows who sent it, and when it  
was sent.  
Below is an example of how your sender information would print on a fax sent from your  
machine:  
03/01/2006 15:33 FAX 123 4567  
YOUR NAME  
DESTINATION ID  
001/001  
(A)  
(B)  
THE SLEREXE COMPANY LIMITED  
SAPORS LANE•BOOLE•DORSET•BH25 8ER  
TELEPHONE BOOLE (945 13) 51617 – FAX 1234567  
Our Ref. 350/PJC/EAC  
(C)  
(D)  
(E)  
(A) Date and time of transmission  
(B) Your fax/telephone number  
You can select <FAX> or <TEL> to be displayed in front of the number. See “TTI position”  
on page 138.  
(C) Your name  
(D) Displays the name of the destination when sending from one-touch or coded speed  
dialing.  
(E) Page number  
Note  
z When sending in black & white, you can set the sender information to print inside or  
outside the image area. See “TTI position” on page 138.  
z For color sending, the sender information is printed inside the print area and the recipient's  
name is not printed.  
z You can enter the sender information from the Operation Panel. See “Registering Your  
Fax/Telephone Number and Name (Sender Information)” on page 85.  
z Three formats of date are available. For details on the date format settings, see “Date  
display” on page 138.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
83  
z Entering the Date And Time  
Note  
When your machine is connected to a computer with the MP Drivers installed, the date and  
time will be read from your computer every time you start the computer, turn the machine on,  
or connect the USB cable.  
The date and time will be reset when you disconnect the power cord or there is a power  
failure. In this case, you can set it again on the machine. Alternatively, it can be read from  
your computer and set on the machine by connecting the machine to your computer with the  
MP driver installed.  
1
2
3
4
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Device settings screen.  
See “Display the Device settings screen.” on page 81.  
Display the User settings screen.  
See “Display the User settings screen.” on page 81.  
Display the Date/time setting screen.  
Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Date/time setting>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
5
Enter the date and time.  
(1) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the date and time (in 24-hour format), then press [OK].  
Enter only the last two digits of the year.  
Note  
z If you misentered the date and time, use [  
number to enter the correct number.  
] or [  
] to move the cursor under the  
z Three formats of date are available. For details on the date format settings, see “Date  
display” on page 138.  
Faxing  
84  
Chapter 5  
z Registering Your Fax/Telephone Number and Name (Sender  
Information)  
1
2
3
4
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Device settings screen.  
See “Display the Device settings screen.” on page 81.  
Display the User settings screen.  
See “Display the User settings screen.” on page 81.  
Display the Unit name/TEL registration screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Unit name/TEL registr.>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
5
Enter your name.  
(1) Use the Numeric buttons to enter your name (max. 24 characters, including spaces),  
then press [ ].  
Note  
For details on how to enter or delete characters, see “Guidelines for Entering Numbers,  
Letters, and Symbols” on page 102.  
6
Enter your fax/telephone number.  
(1) Use the Numeric buttons to enter your fax/telephone number (max. 20 digits, including  
spaces), then press [OK].  
To enter a plus sign (+) before the number, press [#].  
.
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
85  
Note  
z For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Guidelines for Entering Numbers,  
Letters, and Symbols” on page 102.  
z You can print the User’s data list to confirm the sender information you have registered.  
See “Printing the User’s Data List” on page 105.  
Speed Dialing Methods  
Speed dialing allows you to dial fax/telephone numbers by simply pressing a few buttons. The  
following speed dialing methods are available:  
z One-touch Speed Dialing  
Register a fax/telephone number for one-touch speed dialing. To dial the number, press the  
One-Touch Speed Dial Key (01 to 08) assigned to that number and press [Color] or [Black].  
z Coded Speed Dialing  
Register a fax/telephone number for coded speed dialing. To dial the number, press  
[Coded Dial], enter the two-digit code assigned to that number, and press [Color] or  
[Black].  
z Group Dialing  
Register two or more registered one-touch or coded speed dialing numbers for group  
dialing. To send a document to all numbers in that group, either press the One-Touch  
Speed Dial Key (01 to 08) or press [Coded Dial] and enter the two-digit code assigned to  
the group, and then press [Color] or [Black].  
Registering One-Touch Speed Dialing  
Before you can use one-touch speed dialing, you need to register the recipients’ numbers.  
1
2
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the One-touch speed dial screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <TEL number registration>, then press [OK].  
The TEL number registration screen is displayed.  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <One-touch speed dial>, then press [OK].  
The One-touch speed dial screen is displayed.  
(2)  
Faxing  
86  
Chapter 5  
3
Register the recipient’s name and number to a One-Touch Speed Dial Key.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select an unoccupied One-Touch Speed Dial Key (01 to 08), then  
press [OK].  
Note  
You can also select a button by pressing the One-Touch Speed Dial Key (01 to 08).  
(2) Use the Numeric buttons to enter a name for the One-Touch Speed Dial Key (max. 16  
characters, including spaces), then press [OK].  
Note  
For details on how to enter or delete characters, see “Guidelines for Entering Numbers,  
Letters, and Symbols” on page 102.  
(3) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number (max. 60 characters,  
including spaces) you want to register.  
Note  
z For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Guidelines for Entering Numbers,  
Letters, and Symbols” on page 102.  
z Press [Redial/Pause] to enter a pause.  
z Press [ ] to enter a tone.  
4
Finalize registration.  
(1) Press [OK].  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
87  
Note  
z To continue registering One-Touch Speed Dial Keys, repeat the procedure from step 3.  
z Use the destination labels provided with your machine to label the One-Touch Speed Dial  
Keys (01 to 08) with the recipients’ names.  
z For a list of the recipients you have registered, print the one-touch speed dialing list. See  
“Printing Speed Dialing Lists” on page 97.  
z Changing or Deleting a One-Touch Speed Dialing  
z To change a registered name or number:  
(1) Follow steps 1 and 2 under “Registering One-Touch Speed Dialing” on page 86.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the One-Touch Speed Dial Key (01 to 08) to edit, then press  
[OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Edit>, then press [OK].  
(3)  
(4) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the new name (max. 16 characters, including spaces),  
then press [OK].  
(5) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the new fax/telephone number (max. 60 characters,  
including spaces), then press [OK].  
Faxing  
88  
Chapter 5  
z To delete an entire entry:  
(1) Follow steps 1 and 2 under “Registering One-Touch Speed Dialing” on page 86.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the One-Touch Speed Dial Key (01 to 08) to delete, then press  
[OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Delete>, then press [OK].  
(3)  
(4) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
(4)  
Registering Coded Speed Dialing  
Before you can use coded speed dialing, you need to register the recipients’ numbers.  
1
2
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Coded speed dial screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <TEL number registration>, then press [OK].  
The TEL number registration screen is displayed.  
(1)  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
89  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Coded speed dial>, then press [OK].  
The Coded speed dial screen is displayed.  
(2)  
3
Register the recipient’s name and number to a coded speed dialing code.  
(1) Use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select an unoccupied speed dialing  
code (00 to 99), then press [OK].  
(2) Use the Numeric buttons to enter a name for the speed dialing code (max. 16 characters,  
including spaces), then press [OK].  
Note  
For details on how to enter or delete characters, see “Guidelines for Entering Numbers,  
Letters, and Symbols” on page 102.  
(3) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number (max. 60 characters,  
including spaces) you want to register.  
Note  
z For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Guidelines for Entering Numbers,  
Letters, and Symbols” on page 102.  
z Press [Redial/Pause] to enter a pause.  
z Press [ ] to enter a tone.  
Faxing  
90  
Chapter 5  
4
Finalize registration.  
(1) Press [OK].  
Note  
z To continue registering coded speed dialing codes, repeat the procedure from step 3.  
z For a list of the recipients you have registered, print the coded speed dialing list. See  
“Printing Speed Dialing Lists” on page 97.  
z Changing or Deleting a Coded Speed Dialing  
z To change a registered name or number:  
(1) Follow steps 1 and 2 under “Registering Coded Speed Dialing” on page 89.  
(2) Use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select the coded speed dialing code  
to edit, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Edit>, then press [OK].  
(3)  
(4) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the new name (max. 16 characters, including spaces),  
then press [OK].  
(5) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the new fax/telephone number (max. 60 characters,  
including spaces), then press [OK].  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
91  
z To delete an entire entry:  
(1) Follow steps 1 and 2 under “Registering Coded Speed Dialing” on page 89.  
(2) Use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select the coded speed dialing code  
to delete, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Delete>, then press [OK].  
(3)  
(4) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
(4)  
Faxing  
92  
Chapter 5  
Registering Group Dialing  
Before you can use group dialing, you need to register the recipients’ numbers.  
Note  
You can only group numbers that have already been registered for one-touch or coded speed  
dialing. For details on these dialing methods, see “Registering One-Touch Speed Dialing” on  
page 86 and “Registering Coded Speed Dialing” on page 89.  
1
2
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Group dial screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <TEL number registration>, then press [OK].  
The TEL number registration screen is displayed.  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Group dial>, then press [OK].  
The Group dial screen is displayed.  
(2)  
(3) Press [OK].  
Note  
You can register a dialing group either under an unoccupied One-Touch Speed Dial Key or an  
unoccupied coded speed dialing code.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
93  
3
Select a One-Touch Speed Dial Key or coded speed dialing code under which you  
want to register the group.  
z To register a group under a One-Touch Speed Dial Key:  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select an unoccupied key (01 to 08), then press [OK].  
z To register a group under a coded speed dialing code:  
(1) Press [Coded Dial], then use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to enter an  
empty two-digit code (00 to 99), then press [OK].  
4
Register the group’s name.  
(1) Use the Numeric buttons to enter a name for the group (max. 16 characters, including  
spaces), then press [OK].  
Note  
z For details on how to enter or delete characters, see “Guidelines for Entering Numbers,  
Letters, and Symbols” on page 102.  
z Groups will appear on the Group dial list by the names you enter in this step.  
Faxing  
94  
Chapter 5  
5
Enter the one-touch or coded speed dialing numbers you want to register in the  
group.  
z To enter a one-touch speed dialing entry:  
(1) Press the One-Touch Speed Dial Key (01 to 08).  
z To enter a coded speed dialing entry:  
(1) Press [Coded Dial], use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to enter the coded  
speed dialing numbers to register to the group dial, then press [OK].  
Note  
z To continue registering one-touch or coded speed dialing numbers to the group, repeat this  
step.  
z You can only enter numbers that have already been registered for one-touch or coded  
speed dialing (i.e. you cannot enter numbers with the Numeric buttons).  
z To review the numbers you have entered, use [ ] or [ ].  
z To delete an entered number:  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the one-touch or coded speed dial number to delete.  
(2) Press and hold [ ].  
6
Finalize registration.  
(1) Press [OK].  
Note  
z To continue registering group dials, repeat the procedure from step 3.  
z For a list of the entries you have made, print the group dialing list. See “Printing Speed  
Dialing Lists” on page 97.  
z Changing or Deleting a Group Dialing  
z To change a registered name or number:  
(1) Follow steps 1 and 2 under “Registering Group Dialing” on page 93.  
(2) Select the group dial to edit (see “Registering Group Dialing” on page 93), then press  
[OK].  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
95  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Edit>, then press [OK].  
(3)  
(4) Edit the name of the group and the dialing numbers registered in the group as necessary.  
Follow the procedure from step 4 under “Registering Group Dialing” on page 93.  
z To delete an entire group:  
(1) Follow steps 1 and 2 under “Registering Group Dialing” on page 93.  
(2) Select the group dial to delete (see “Registering Group Dialing” on page 93), then press  
[OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Delete>, then press [OK].  
(3)  
(4) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
(4)  
Faxing  
96  
Chapter 5  
Printing Speed Dialing Lists  
You can print a list of the recipients registered for speed dialing. You may want to keep the list  
near your machine to refer to it when dialing.  
1
2
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Print report/list screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Print report/list>, then press [OK].  
The Print report/list screen is displayed.  
(1)  
3
Print the speed dialing list.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Telephone number list>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <One-touch speed dial>, <Coded speed dial>, or <Group dial>,  
then press [OK].  
(2)  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
97  
z If you selected <One-touch speed dial> or <Coded speed dial>  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select whether to print the list in numerical order of the fax/telephone  
numbers, or in alphabetical order of the registered names.  
(3)  
– <Yes>:  
Prints the list with the destination names in alphabetical order.  
– <No>:  
Prints the list with the registered entries in numerical order.  
z If you selected <Group dial>  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
(3)  
– <Yes>:  
Prints the speed dialing list.  
– <No>:  
Returns to the Telephone number list screen.  
Faxing  
98  
Chapter 5  
Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)  
Some countries adopt the daylight saving time (summer time) system that shifts the clock time  
forward or back at certain periods of the year.  
You can set your machine to automatically change the time by registering the day and time that  
daylight saving (summer time) begins and ends.  
1
2
3
4
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Device settings screen.  
See “Display the Device settings screen.” on page 81.  
Display the User settings screen.  
See “Display the User settings screen.” on page 81.  
Display the Summer time setting screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Summer time setting>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
5
Enable summer time.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <ON> to enable summer time, then press [OK].  
(1)  
To disable summer time, select <OFF>.  
6
Specify the summer time start date/time settings.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Start date/time>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
99  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the month when summer time starts, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the week when summer time starts, then press [OK].  
(4) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the day of the week when summer time starts, then press [OK].  
(5) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time starts,  
then press [OK].  
Precede single digits with a zero.  
The summer time start date/time is set.  
7
Specify the summer time end date/time settings.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <End date/time>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
Faxing  
100  
Chapter 5  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the month when summer time ends, then press [OK].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the week when summer time ends, then press [OK].  
(4) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the day of the week when summer time ends, then press [OK].  
(5) Use the Numeric buttons to enter the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time ends,  
then press [OK].  
Precede single digits with a zero.  
The summer time end date/time is set.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
101  
Guidelines for Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols  
1
Press [ ] to switch to uppercase letter mode (:A), lowercase letter mode (:a), or  
number mode (:1).  
You can see what mode you are in by the character displayed to the right of <Unit name> or  
<Name>.  
Example: uppercase letter mode  
Note  
Lowercase letter mode (:a) may not be available depending on the country of purchase.  
2
Use the Numeric buttons to enter a character.  
Press the button repeatedly until the character you want appears.  
z To enter a character that is under the same button as the previous entry:  
(1) Press [  
], then press the same Numeric button.  
z To enter a space:  
(1) Press [  
] twice. In number mode, press [  
] once.  
z To delete a character:  
(1) Press [  
z To delete an entire entry:  
(1) Press and hold [ ].  
Models with lowercase letter mode:  
].  
Button  
Uppercase letter mode  
Lowercase letter mode Number mode  
[1]  
1
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
ABCÅÄÁÀÃÂÆÇ  
DEFËÉÈÊ  
GH I Ï Í Ì Î  
abcåäáàãâæç  
defëéèê  
gh i ï í ì î  
jkl  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
JKL  
MNOÑØÖÓÒÕÔ  
PQRSÞ  
mnoñøöóòõô  
pqrsþ  
TUVÜÚÙÛ  
WXYZÝ  
tuvüúùû  
wxyzý  
Faxing  
102  
Chapter 5  
Button  
Uppercase letter mode  
Lowercase letter mode Number mode  
[0]  
0
[#]  
-. #!",;:^`_=/|’?$@%&+()[]{}<>  
[
]
Press [ ] to switch to uppercase letter mode (:A), lowercase letter mode (:a), or  
number mode (:1).  
Models without lowercase letter mode:  
Button  
Letter mode  
Number mode  
[1]  
1
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
[0]  
[#]  
ABCabc  
DEFdef  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
GHIghi  
JKLjkl  
MNOmno  
PQRSpqrs  
TUVtuv  
WXYZwxyz  
-. #!",;:^`_=/|’?$@%&+()[]{}<>  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
103  
Summary of Reports and Lists  
The table below shows the reports and lists that can be printed from your machine. Refer to the  
pages indicated for more details.  
Report Or List  
Description  
Activity report  
Shows recent facsimile transactions performed by your machine.  
You can enable or disable automatic printing of this report after  
every 20 transactions. You can also print it manually.  
See “Activity Report” on page 105.  
One-touch speed dial list  
Coded speed dial list  
Group dial list  
Lists the numbers and names registered for one-touch speed  
dialing. See “Printing Speed Dialing Lists” on page 97.  
Lists the numbers and names registered for coded dial speed  
dialing. See “Printing Speed Dialing Lists” on page 97.  
Lists group registered for group dialing.  
See “Printing Speed Dialing Lists” on page 97.  
User’s data list  
Memory list  
Lists the current settings of your machine and the registered  
sender information.  
See “User’s Data List” on page 105.  
Lists the documents currently stored in the machine’s memory.  
See “Documents Stored in Memory” on page 113.  
TX (Transmission)  
report  
Prints after transmission of a document.  
You can enable or disable this feature, or set the machine to print a  
report only when an error occurs.  
You can also set the machine to print the first page of the  
document under the transmission report to remind you of the  
contents of the document.  
See “TX Report” on page 106.  
RX (Reception)  
report  
Prints after reception of a document.  
You can enable or disable this feature, or set the machine to print a  
report only when an error occurs. See “RX Report” on page 106.  
MULTI TX/RX  
(Transaction) report  
Prints after sequential broadcasting of a document.  
Faxing  
104  
Chapter 5  
Activity Report  
The machine is factory-set to print an Activity report after every 20 transactions. You can also  
disable automatic printing of this report, or print it manually.  
Note  
For details on the Activity report setting, see “Activity report” on page 137.  
z Printing the Activity Report Manually  
1
2
3
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Print report/list screen.  
See “Display the Print report/list screen.” on page 97.  
Print the Activity report.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Activity report>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
The Activity report is printed.  
(2)  
User’s Data List  
The User’s data list enables you to confirm the current settings of your machine as well as the  
registered sender information. See “Registering Sender Information” on page 83.  
z Printing the User’s Data List  
1
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
2
Display the Print report/list screen.  
See “Display the Print report/list screen.” on page 97.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
105  
3
Print the User’s data list.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <User’s data list>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
The User's data list is printed.  
(2)  
TX Report  
Your machine can print a TX (transmission) report after sending a document. You can set the  
machine to print every time it sends a document, or only when an error occurs. Alternatively, you  
can disable printing of the report.  
Note  
z For details on the TX report setting, see “TX report” on page 139.  
z The default setting is <Print error only>.  
RX Report  
Your machine can print an RX (reception) report after receiving a document. You can set the  
machine to print every time it receives a document, or only when an error occurs. Alternatively,  
you can disable printing of the report.  
Note  
z For details on the RX report setting, see “RX report” on page 140.  
z The default setting is <Do not print>.  
Sending Faxes  
Documents You Can Fax  
For information on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and details on  
loading them, see “Loading Documents to Copy, Fax, or Scan” on page 19.  
Before Sending Faxes  
The machine enables you to adjust the resolution and scan contrast to suit the type of document.  
Faxing  
106  
Chapter 5  
z Adjusting the Image Quality (Fax Resolution)  
You can adjust the image quality (fax resolution) of the document you send. The higher the  
image quality, the better the output quality at the other end, but the slower the transmission  
speed. Adjust the image quality according to the type of document you are sending.  
1
2
Display the FAX Quality screen.  
(1) Press [FAX], then press [FAX Quality].  
Select the resolution.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <FAX resolution>.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the resolution, then press [OK].  
<Standard>:  
<Fine>:  
Suitable for text-only documents.  
Suitable for fine-print documents.  
Suitable for photographs.  
<Photo>:  
Note  
When sending color faxes, selecting <Fine> has the same effect as selecting <Photo>.  
z Adjusting the Scan Contrast  
Contrast is the degree of difference between light and dark. Increasing the contrast setting  
further blackens dark areas and whitens bright areas, whereas decreasing the contrast setting  
reduces the difference between bright and dark areas. You can adjust the contrast among three  
contrast levels.  
1
2
Display the FAX Quality screen.  
See “Display the FAX Quality screen.” on page 107.  
Select the scan contrast.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Scan contrast>.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the scan contrast, then press [OK].  
Pressing [  
] decreases the density, and pressing [  
] increases the density.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
107  
Sending Methods  
There are four methods of sending faxes:  
z Sending from your machine (Memory sending)  
z Sending manually from your machine  
z Sending to multiple recipients from your machine in one operation (Sequential broadcasting)  
z Sending from your computer  
This section describes how to use these methods.  
z Sending From Your Machine (Memory Sending)  
1
Prepare for faxing.  
(1) Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
(2) Load the document on the Platen Glass or the ADF.  
Important  
When sending a double-sided document, set the document on the Platen Glass. You  
cannot scan double-sided documents from the ADF.  
Note  
For details on document requirements and how to load documents, see “Loading  
Documents to Copy, Fax, or Scan” on page 19.  
(3) Press [FAX].  
(4) Adjust fax settings as necessary.  
See “Before Sending Faxes” on page 106.  
2
Start faxing.  
(1) Dial the recipient’s number using the Numeric buttons or speed dialing.  
(2) Press [Color] for color sending, or [Black] for black & white sending.  
Note  
For details on how to use speed dialog, see “How to Use Speed Dialing” on page 111.  
z When the document was loaded on the Platen Glass:  
(3) When the following message is displayed, load the next page on the Platen Glass.  
If you have only one page of document to scan, go to step (6).  
(4) Press [Color] or [Black].  
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) to scan in all pages of the document.  
(6) Press [OK].  
Faxing  
108  
Chapter 5  
z When the document was loaded in the ADF:  
The machine starts sending automatically after the document is scanned in.  
Important  
Color sending is available only when the recipient’s fax machine supports color faxing.  
Note  
z To cancel sending a fax, press [Stop/Reset]. To cancel sending a fax while it is being sent,  
press [Stop/Reset], then follow the instructions on the LCD.  
z If documents remain in the ADF after pressing [Stop/Reset] during scanning, <Document in  
ADF.> appears on the LCD. Press [OK] so that the remaining document is automatically  
fed out.  
z Sending From Your Machine (Manual Sending)  
Use manual sending if you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the  
recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.  
Important  
z With manual sending, you cannot use the Platen Glass to load documents.  
z You will need to connect a telephone to your machine if you want to talk to the recipient  
before sending a document.  
z If you select <Germany> in the <Country select> when installing your machine, the manual  
sending is not available. You need to execute the memory sending (See “Sending From  
Your Machine (Memory Sending)” on page 108).  
1
Connect a telephone to your machine if you want to talk to the recipient before  
sending a document.  
Note  
For details on how to connect a telephone, refer to the Easy Setup Instructions.  
2
3
Prepare for faxing.  
See “Prepare for faxing.” on page 108.  
Start faxing.  
(1) Press [Hook] or lift the handset.  
(2) Dial the recipient’s number using the Numeric buttons or speed dialing.  
Note  
z For details on how to use speed dialing, see “How to Use Speed Dialing” on page 111.  
z If you pressed [Hook], dial on this machine.  
z When sending from a telephone connected to the machine, dial on the telephone.  
(3) Talk to the recipient on the phone.  
Note  
If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the recipient’s voice, go to step (5).  
(4) Ask the recipient to operate the recipient’s fax machine to receive faxes.  
(5) When you hear a high-pitched signal, press [Color] for color sending, or [Black] for black  
& white sending. Then hang up the handset.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
109  
Important  
Color sending is available only when the recipient’s fax machine supports color faxing.  
Note  
To cancel manual sending, press [Stop/Reset].  
z Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential  
Broadcasting)  
Your machine allows you to send the same document to a maximum of 109 recipients in one  
operation. You can dial the recipients’ numbers using any of the following dialing methods:  
z One-touch speed dialing: up to 8 destinations  
z Coded speed dialing: up to 100 destinations  
z Regular dialing (using the Numeric buttons) or redialing: one destination  
You can enter the destinations in any order, but be sure to press [OK] after your entry with the  
Numeric buttons.  
Note  
If you frequently send documents to the same group of recipients, you can group these  
numbers for group dialing. This will allow you to send documents to all recipients in the group  
at the press of one or a few buttons. See “Registering Group Dialing” on page 93.  
1
2
Prepare for faxing.  
See “Prepare for faxing.” on page 108.  
Start faxing.  
(1) Enter the recipients’ numbers one by one using the Numeric buttons or speed dialing.  
When using One-touch speed dialing:  
Press the One-Touch Speed Dial Key (01 to 08) that has been assigned the number  
you want to dial. Repeat this operation to specify all recipients.  
When using Coded speed dialing:  
Press [Coded Dial], use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to enter the  
two-digit code (00 to 99) assigned to the number you want to dial, then press [OK].  
When using regular dialing:  
Use the Numeric buttons to enter the recipient’s number, then press [OK].  
Note  
To review the numbers you have entered, use [ ] or [ ].  
(2) Press [Color] for color sending, or [Black] for black & white sending.  
Faxing  
110  
Chapter 5  
z When the document was loaded on the Platen Glass:  
(3) When the following message is displayed, load the next page on the Platen Glass.  
If you have only one page of document to scan, go to step (6).  
(4) Press [Color] or [Black].  
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) to scan in all pages of the document.  
(6) Press [OK].  
z When the document was loaded in the ADF:  
The machine starts sending automatically after the document is scanned in.  
Important  
Color sending is available only when the recipient’s fax machine supports color faxing.  
Note  
z To cancel sequential broadcasting, press [Stop/Reset]. To cancel sending a fax while it is  
being sent, press [Stop/Reset], then follow the instructions on the LCD.  
z When you press [Stop/Reset], sending to all recipients will be canceled. You cannot cancel  
sending to only one recipient.  
z Sending Faxes from Your Computer  
If your machine is connected to a computer, you can send faxes using the fax driver from any  
application software that has a printing function. For details, refer to the FAX Driver Guide.  
How to Use Speed Dialing  
Registering fax or telephone numbers in speed dials enables you to dial them easily.  
To send a fax using speed, dial the recipient’s number, then press [Color] or [Black].  
Three speed dialing methods are provided:  
z One-touch speed dialing  
z Coded speed dialing  
z Group dialing  
Note  
z If no number is registered in the speed dialing button, the machine makes an alarm sound.  
z For details on how to register numbers in speed dialing buttons, see “Speed Dialing  
Methods” on page 86.  
z For details on how to send faxes, see “Sending Methods” on page 108.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
111  
z One-Touch Speed Dialing  
Pre-registering fax numbers in the One-Touch Speed Dial Keys (01 to 08) enables you to dial  
them at the touch of a button.  
1
Press the One-Touch Speed Dial Key (01 to 08) that has been assigned the  
number you want to dial.  
z Coded Speed Dialing  
Pre-registering fax numbers in coded speed dials enables you to dial them by just pressing  
[Coded Dial] and entering a two-digit code.  
1
2
Press [Coded Dial].  
Use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to enter the two-digit code (00 to 99)  
assigned to the number you want to dial, then press [OK].  
z Group Dialing  
Pre-registering fax numbers in group dials enables you to send a document to all numbers in  
that group by just pressing the One-Touch Speed Dial Key, or [Coded Dial] followed by the two-  
digit code.  
z For a group registered for one-touch speed dialing:  
(1) Press the One-Touch Speed Dial Key assigned to the group you want to dial. See  
“Registering One-Touch Speed Dialing” on page 86.  
z For a group registered for coded speed dialing:  
(1) Press [Coded Dial], use the Numeric buttons to enter the two-digit code (00 to 99)  
assigned to the number you want to dial, then press [OK]. See “Registering Coded Speed  
Dialing” on page 89.  
Redialing a Busy Number  
There are two methods of redialing: Manual redialing and Automatic redialing.  
z Manual Redialing  
To redial the fax number last dialed with the Numeric buttons, press [Redial/Pause].  
Faxing  
112  
Chapter 5  
Note  
z For details on memory sending, see “Sending From Your Machine (Memory Sending)” on  
page 108.  
z To cancel manual redialing, press [Stop/Reset].  
z Automatic Redialing  
When using memory sending to send a document and the recipient’s line is busy, your machine  
will redial the number after a specified interval.  
Note  
z Your machine enables you to customize automatic redialing settings to suit your needs.  
z To cancel automatic redialing, wait until the machine starts redialing, press [Stop/Reset],  
then follow the instructions on the LCD.  
z You can also delete the document from memory. For details, see “Printing or Deleting a  
Document in Memory” on page 114.  
z Customizing Automatic Redialing Settings  
You can customize the following settings:  
• Whether or not your machine redials automatically  
• The number of times the machine redials (1 to 10 times)  
• The time interval between redials  
Note  
For details on the redialing settings, see “Auto redial” on page 139.  
Documents Stored in Memory  
Important  
If you disconnect the power cord, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. Send or  
print all the documents stored in memory you do not wish to lose them before disconnecting  
the power cord.  
z Printing a List of Documents in Memory  
The machine can print a list of documents stored in memory (Memory list) showing the  
transaction number (TX/RX NO.), transaction mode, recipient name, number of pages, date, and  
transmission time of each document. When printing or deleting documents in memory, specify a  
document by its transaction number.  
1
2
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Memory reference screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Memory reference>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
113  
3
Print the Memory list.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Print memory list>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
The list of documents stored in memory is printed.  
(2)  
Note  
z If there are no documents stored in memory, <There is no document in memory.> is  
displayed, and the machine returns to the previous screen.  
z In step 2, you can also select <Print report/list> (see “Summary of Reports and Lists” on  
page 104) and then <Memory list> to print the Memory list.  
z Printing or Deleting a Document in Memory  
Note  
When printing or deleting documents in memory, specify a document by its transaction  
number. If you are unsure of the transaction number, print the Memory list. See “Printing a List  
of Documents in Memory” on page 113.  
1
2
3
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Display the Memory reference screen.  
See “Display the Memory reference screen.” on page 113.  
Print or delete the document.  
z To print a document:  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Print specified document>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
Faxing  
114  
Chapter 5  
(2) Use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [  
], [  
] to select the transaction number (TX/  
RX NO.) of the document you want to print, or enter the number using the Numeric  
buttons, then press [OK].  
If you are unsure of the transaction number, print the Memory list. See “Printing a List of  
Documents in Memory” on page 113.  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes> to print the first page only, or <No> to print all pages of  
the document.  
(3)  
(4) To print other documents, repeat steps (2) and (3).  
(5) Press [Back] or [Stop/Reset].  
z To delete a document:  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Delete specified doc.>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
(2) Use the Numeric buttons or [ ], [ ], [  
], [  
] to select the transaction number (TX/  
RX NO.) of the document you want to delete, or enter the number using the Numeric  
buttons, then press [OK].  
If you are unsure of the transaction number, print the Memory list. See “Printing a List of  
Documents in Memory” on page 113.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
115  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes> to delete the document.  
(3)  
To cancel deletion and return to step (2), press <No>.  
(4) To delete other documents, repeat steps (2) and (3).  
(5) Press [Back] or [Stop/Reset].  
z Checking a Document’s Details in Memory  
If the machine was not able to print a received fax, as when paper has run out or a paper jam  
has occurred or if ink is running low, the fax is automatically stored in memory. When selecting a  
document in memory to be printed or deleted, you can check its details on the LCD as follows:  
(A)  
(A) Transaction number (TX/RX NO.)  
z A transaction number from 0001 to 4999 indicates a document being sent.  
z A transaction number from 5001 to 9999 indicates a document being received.  
Note  
z If you are unsure of the transaction number, print the Memory list. See “Printing a List of  
Documents in Memory” on page 113.  
z If the fax is being sent or received, <Doc. is in communication...> is displayed.  
Faxing  
116  
Chapter 5  
Special Dialing  
z Dialing through a Switchboard  
A PBX (Private Branch Exchange) is an on-site telephone switchboard. If your machine is  
connected through a PBX or other telephone switching systems, you have to dial the outside line  
access number first, and then the number of the party you are calling.  
z Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing  
Many information services for banks, airline reservations, hotel reservations, etc. require tone  
dialing for their services. If your machine is connected to a rotary pulse line, you can set the  
machine to temporarily switch to tone dialing.  
1
2
3
4
Press [FAX].  
Press [Hook] or lift the handset.  
Use the Numeric buttons to dial the number of the information service.  
When the recorded message of the information service answers, press [Tone] ([ ])  
to switch to tone dialing.  
If you pressed [Hook] in step 2 and wish to talk to the other party, lift the handset.  
5
6
Use the Numeric buttons to enter the numbers requested by the information  
service.  
When you have finished using the service, press [Hook] or hang up the handset.  
z Sending/Receiving Using ECM  
This machine is set to send/receive faxes in ECM (Error Correction Mode). ECM automatically  
corrects errors caused by connection troubles, cross-checking the sending and receiving  
conditions at the sending and receiving ends.  
Note  
z If the sender's or receiver’s fax is not ECM-compatible, the fax will be sent/received in the  
standard mode.  
z You can disable ECM sending/receiving. See “ECM TX” on page 138 and “ECM RX” on  
page 139.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
117  
Receiving Faxes  
Flow of Receiving Faxes  
The operation flow of receiving faxes is as follows:  
Step 1: Load paper. See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
Note  
z The paper size should be A4, LTR or LGL.  
z Load legal-sized paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
Step 2: Select the receive mode.  
z If you want to receive only faxes automatically with your machine, or have a dedicated  
telephone line for fax use only:  
<FAX only>  
See “If You Want to Receive Only Faxes Automatically with Your Machine, or Have a  
Dedicated Telephone Line for Fax Use Only:” on page 119.  
z If you receive mainly voice calls and sometimes faxes, or you want to receive faxes manually:  
<Manual RX>  
See “If You Receive Mainly Voice Calls and Sometimes Faxes, or Want to Receive Faxes  
Manually:” on page 120.  
z If you want to receive voice messages on your answering machine and receive faxes  
automatically:  
<Ans. machine connect.>  
See“If You Want to Receive Voice Messages on Your Answering Machine and Receive Faxes  
Automatically:” on page 120.  
z If you want to receive faxes automatically as well as voice calls:  
<FAX/TEL auto switch>  
See “If You Want to Receive Faxes Automatically as well as Voice Calls:” on page 120.  
z If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service with your  
telephone company (US and Canada only):  
<DRPD>  
See “If You Have Subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) Service with  
Your Telephone Company (US and Canada only):” on page 121.  
z If you want your machine to automatically switch between fax and voice calls by the call ring  
patterns (Network Switch):  
<Network switch>  
See “If You Want Your Machine to Automatically Switch between Fax and Voice Calls by the  
Call Ring Patterns (Network Switch):” on page 121.  
Note  
z To use the <Manual RX>, <FAX/TEL auto switch>, <DRPD>, or <Network switch> mode,  
you need to have a telephone connected to the External Device Jack of your machine.  
z To use the <Ans. machine connect.> mode, you need to have an answering machine  
connected to the External Device Jack of your machine.  
Faxing  
118  
Chapter 5  
Paper Size and Type  
Load A4- or letter-sized plain paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder or Cassette to print the fax.  
Important  
z Load legal-sized paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
z If paper of size other than A4, letter or legal is loaded in the paper source specified under  
[Feed Switch], the received faxes will not be printed and <Check the page size and press  
[OK].> is displayed. Replace the paper loaded in the specified paper source with A4, letter  
or legal sized paper, then press [OK]. Only A4- or Letter-sized paper can be fed from the  
cassette.  
z If the paper is set to a size other than <A4>, <8.5" x 11">, or <8.5" x 14">, or if it is set to a  
type other than <Plain paper>, the received faxes will not be printed and <Received in  
memory. Change the paper. A4/8.5x11/8.5x14 Plain> is displayed. Correct the paper size  
and type, and then press [OK]. For details on how to change the print settings, see  
“Changing the Print Settings” on page 37.  
z When feeding paper from the cassette, only <A4> or <8.5" x 11"> can be set for paper size.  
<8.5" x 14"> cannot be selected.  
z If the paper size for both paper sources is either A4 or letter and the size and type of paper  
is the same, the continuous auto feed function can be applied. See “Continuous printing on  
the same type/size of paper by using both the Auto Sheet Feeder and Cassette together”  
on page 26.  
Note  
If the sender sends a document that is larger than letter-size, such as 11" x17" or legal-size,  
the sender’s machine may send the fax automatically shrunk or divided, or send only a part of  
the original.  
Receive Modes  
Select the receive mode according to your needs.  
Important  
The machine cannot receive faxes when the power is turned OFF. Press [ON/OFF] to turn the  
power ON.  
Note  
The machine can receive faxes in any mode, such as copy mode (when [COPY] is pressed),  
fax mode (when [FAX] is pressed), scan mode (when [SCAN] is pressed), or memory card  
mode (when [MEMORY CARD] is pressed). However, faxes that are received are printed  
immediately only in fax mode, in other modes they are printed approximately three minutes  
after they are received. Press [FAX] to print faxes immediately after they are received.  
z If You Want to Receive Only Faxes Automatically with Your Machine, or  
Have a Dedicated Telephone Line for Fax Use Only:  
Select <FAX only>.  
When you receive a fax call:  
The machine will receive the fax automatically.  
When you receive a voice call:  
You will not be able to answer the call.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
119  
Note  
The telephone does not ring when it receives a fax call. If you want it to ring, connect a  
telephone to your machine and enable the <Incoming ring> setting. See “Incoming ring” on  
page 140. You can also select the number of rings before the machine answers. See  
“Incoming ring” on page 140.  
z If You Receive Mainly Voice Calls and Sometimes Faxes, or Want to  
Receive Faxes Manually:  
Select <Manual RX>.  
When you receive a fax call:  
The telephone will ring. Pick up the handset and if you hear a high-pitched signal, press  
[Color] or [Black] on the machine to receive the fax.  
When you receive a voice call:  
The telephone will ring. Pick up the handset to answer the call.  
For remote receiving:  
If you are far from your machine, dial 25 (the remote receiving ID) on your telephone to  
receive faxes.  
Note  
z The machine can be set to receive faxes automatically after the telephone rings for a  
specified length of time. See “Manual/auto switch” on page 140.  
z You can customize remote receiving by enabling/disabling it, or by changing the remote  
receiving ID. See “Remote RX” on page 140.  
z If you have an answering machine connected to your machine that can carry out remote-  
control operations (controlling your answering machine from a remote telephone), the  
security code for this function may be the same as the remote receiving ID. If so, make  
sure you change the machine’s remote receiving ID to make it distinct from the answering  
machine’s security code. See “Remote RX” on page 140.  
z If the paper is not set on the sending side, your machine will go into the reception standby  
mode.  
z If You Want to Receive Voice Messages on Your Answering Machine  
and Receive Faxes Automatically:  
Select <Ans. machine connect.>.  
When you receive a fax call:  
First the answering machine connected to your machine will respond to an incoming call,  
and then the machine will receive faxes automatically.  
When you receive a voice call:  
The answering machine connected to your machine will respond to an incoming call.  
z Adjusting the Answering Machine  
Adjust your answering machine as follows:  
• Set the answering machine to answer on the first or second ring.  
• The entire message should be no longer than 15 seconds.  
• In the message, tell your callers how to send a fax.  
z If You Want to Receive Faxes Automatically as well as Voice Calls:  
Select <FAX/TEL auto switch>.  
When you receive a fax call:  
The machine will receive the fax automatically.  
Faxing  
120  
Chapter 5  
When you receive a voice call:  
The machine will ring. Pick up the telephone or answering machine connected to your  
machine.  
Note  
The telephone does not ring when it receives a fax call. If you want it to ring, connect a  
telephone to your machine and enable the <Incoming ring> setting. See “Incoming ring” on  
page 140. You can also select the number of rings before the machine answers. See  
“Incoming ring” on page 140.  
z Customizing FAX/TEL Auto Switch  
You can customize this mode to control precisely how your machine handles incoming  
calls. You can adjust the time the machine takes to check whether a call is a fax or voice  
call, the length of time the machine rings when it is a voice call, and the behavior the  
machine takes if a voice call is not answered in this time.  
Note  
For details on the FAX/TEL Auto Switch settings, see “FAX/TEL auto switch” on page 139.  
z If You Have Subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)  
Service with Your Telephone Company (US and Canada only):  
Select <DRPD>.  
When you receive a fax call:  
The machine will ring according to the ring pattern you have chosen and receive the fax  
automatically.  
When you receive a voice call:  
The telephone will ring according to the ring pattern you have chosen. Pick up the handset  
to answer the call.  
z Setting the Ring Pattern  
Your telephone company will assign a distinctive ring pattern to each number when you  
order the DRPD service. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by the  
telephone company.  
z If You Want Your Machine to Automatically Switch between Fax and  
Voice Calls by the Call Ring Patterns (Network Switch):  
Select <Network switch>.  
When you receive a fax call:  
The machine will ring and receive the fax automatically.  
When you receive a voice call:  
The telephone will ring. Pick up the handset to answer the call.  
Note  
To use this feature, you need to subscribe to a compatible service provided by your telephone  
company. Contact your telephone company for details.  
Setting the Receive Mode  
1
Display the FAX menu.  
See “Display the FAX menu.” on page 81.  
Faxing  
Chapter 5  
121  
2
3
Display the Receive mode settings screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Receive mode settings>, then press [OK].  
(1)  
Select a receive mode.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select a receive mode, then press [OK].  
Note  
For details on the receive modes, see “Receive Modes” on page 119.  
The receive mode will be displayed on the LCD.  
Canceling Receiving  
Press [Stop/Reset] and follow any instructions on the LCD.  
Memory Receiving  
If ink has run low while receiving a fax, if the paper size setting is incorrect, or if the paper type is  
set to a type other than plain paper, the fax is automatically stored in memory and <Received in  
memory.> is displayed. When the ink tank is replaced or the paper size/type setting is corrected,  
the stored fax is printed automatically.  
Note  
z The machine can store up to approximately 250 pages* of faxes in memory.  
z If the memory becomes full, the machine cannot receive any more faxes. Print or delete  
the documents stored in memory, and then contact the sender and have him/her resend  
them.  
* When using ITU-T No.1 chart (Standard mode)  
Faxing  
122  
Chapter 5  
Chapter 6  
Printing from Your Computer  
This section describes the basic printing procedure, taking the steps to print documents as an  
example.  
Printing with Windows  
Note  
z Menu and command names may differ between application softwares, and more steps may be  
required. For details, refer to the documentation for each application software you use.  
z The steps described in this section are for printing in Windows XP Service Pack 2 (hereafter,  
called Windows XP SP2).  
z If your machine is connected to a computer, you can send faxes using the fax driver from any  
application software that has a printing function. For details, refer to the FAX Driver Guide.  
1
2
3
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Load the paper in the machine.  
See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
Ensure that the proper paper source is selected.  
When the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp (A) is lit, paper is fed from the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
When the Cassette Lamp (B) is lit, paper is fed from the Cassette.  
(A)  
(B)  
Note  
Specify [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the Cassette.  
4
Create a document or open a file to print from the application software.  
Printing from Your Computer  
Chapter 6  
123  
5
Open the printer properties dialog box.  
(1) Select [Print] from the application software’s [File] menu.  
The [Print] dialog box opens.  
(2) Ensure that your machine is selected.  
Note  
If another name of the machine is selected, click the name of the machine to use.  
(3) Click [Preferences] or [Properties].  
The [Main] tab of the [Printing Preferences] screen is displayed.  
(2)  
(3)  
6
Specify the required settings.  
(1) Click [Media Type] to select the type of media loaded in the machine.  
(2) Ensure that [Paper Feed Switch] is selected from [Paper Source].  
(3) Specify the print quality and other settings in [Print Quality] or [Color/Intensity].  
Note  
For print settings, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
Printing from Your Computer  
124  
Chapter 6  
(4) Click [OK].  
The [Print] dialog box opens.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
Note  
z To confirm the page size, click on the [Page Setup] tab. If it does not match the document  
size set by the application software, select the matching page size.  
z This section describes the procedure for selecting [Paper Feed Switch] from [Paper  
Source]. For a detailed description of the [Paper Source] settings, refer to the Printer Driver  
Guide.  
z For details about other printer driver functions, click [Instructions] or [Help] to view the  
Printer Driver Guide. [Instructions] is only displayed when the Printer Driver Guide is  
installed.  
z Selecting the [Preview before printing] check box displays a preview screen that allows you  
to confirm the selected printing effects and how your document will look when printed.  
Some application softwares do not have a preview function.  
Printing from Your Computer  
Chapter 6  
125  
7
Print the document.  
(1) Click [Print] or [OK].  
The machine starts printing.  
(1)  
Note  
z You can cancel a print job in progress by simply pressing [Stop/Reset] on the machine.  
z Click [Cancel Printing] on Canon IJ Status Monitor to stop printing. To show Canon IJ  
Status Monitor, click [Canon MP830 Series Printer] on the taskbar.  
Printing with Macintosh  
Note  
z Menu and command names may differ between application softwares, and more steps may be  
required. For details, refer to the documentation for each application software you use.  
z The steps described in this section are for printing in Mac® OS X v.10.4.  
1
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
2
Load the paper on the machine.  
See “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
Printing from Your Computer  
126  
Chapter 6  
3
Ensure that the proper paper source is selected.  
When the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp (A) is lit, paper is fed from the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
When the Cassette Lamp (B) is lit, paper is fed from the Cassette.  
(A)  
(B)  
Note  
Specify [Feed Switch] so that the Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and the Cassette Lamp is lit when feeding paper from the Cassette.  
4
5
Create a document or open a file to print from the application software.  
Select the page size.  
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the application software’s [File] menu.  
The [Page Setup] dialog box opens.  
(2) Confirm that [MP830] is selected in [Format for].  
(3) Select the desired page size from [Paper Size].  
(4) Click [OK].  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
6
Specify the required settings.  
(1) Select [Print] from the application software’s [File] menu.  
The [Print] dialog box opens.  
(2) Select [Quality & Media] from the pop-up menu.  
(3) Select the desired media type from [Media Type].  
(4) Ensure that [Paper Feed Switch] is selected from [Paper Source].  
Printing from Your Computer  
Chapter 6  
127  
(5) Select the print mode appropriate to your document from [Print Mode].  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
Note  
z This section describes the procedure for selecting [Paper Feed Switch] from [Paper  
Source]. For a detailed description of the [Paper Source] settings, refer to the Printer Driver  
Guide.  
z When you select the print mode appropriate to your document from [Print Mode], the  
document will be printed in color and at a print quality suited to the characteristics of the  
[Media Type] you have selected.  
– [Printing a top-quality photo]: Select when printing documents consisting mainly of  
photographs and graphics featuring fine color gradation.  
– [Printing tables and charts]: Select when printing documents consisting mainly of graphs  
and graphics (illustrations) with strong color definition.  
– [Printing a composite document]: Select when printing documents consisting mainly of  
text.  
– [Detailed Setting]: Select to fine-tune the [Print Quality] and [Halftoning] settings.  
z For details about other printer driver functions, click on [Quality & Media], [Color  
Options], [Spacial Effects], [Borderless Printing], or [Margin] from the pop-up menu in the  
Print dialog box, to view the Printer Driver Guide. If the Printer Driver Guide is not installed,  
the Printer Driver Guide is not displayed even if  
is clicked.  
z Clicking [Preview] displays a preview screen that allows you to confirm the selected  
printing effects and how your document will look when printed. Some application softwares  
do not have a preview function.  
7
Print the document.  
(1) Click [Print].  
The machine starts printing.  
Note  
Double-clicking the name of your machine in the [Printer List] of the [Printer Setup Utility]  
(When using Mac OS X v.10.2, double-clicking the name of your machine in the [Printer list] of  
the [Print Center]) displays a dialog that prompts you to confirm the status of the print job(s).  
To cancel a job in progress, select the desired document, then click [Delete]. To temporarily  
stop a job in progress, click [Hold]. To stop all the jobs in the list, click [Stop Jobs].  
Printing from Your Computer  
128  
Chapter 6  
Chapter 7  
Scanning Images  
This section describes how to scan images.  
About Scanning Images  
You can scan images from the machine to a computer without printing them and save them in  
popular file formats, such as JPEG, Tiff, Bitmap. Scanned data saved on your computer can be  
processed using image processing software. Furthermore, you can use the OCR (Optical Character  
Recognition) software to convert scanned paper documents to text data.  
Before Scanning  
Before scanning images, confirm the following:  
z Are the necessary software (MP Drivers and MP Navigator) installed?  
If the software is not yet installed, refer to the Easy Setup Instructions.  
z Does the document to be scanned meet the requirements for an original to be set on the  
Platen Glass or the ADF?  
For details, see “Loading Documents” on page 20.  
z
Is the machine connected to a computer correctly?  
Confirm that the connection between the machine and the computer is physically secure.  
Scanning Methods  
Scanning Using the MP Navigator  
MP Navigator enables you to scan in documents loaded on the Platen Glass or the ADF and  
view images saved on your computer or on a memory card. Scanned documents can be  
previewed and be easily printed and edited according to your needs.  
You can use the supplied application software to edit or print the document you have scanned.  
Double-click the [MP Navigator 2.2] icon on your desktop to launch MP Navigator.  
Select [Applications] from the [Go] menu, then double-click the [MP Navigator 2.2] icon to launch  
MP Navigator.  
You can launch the following application software from the MP Navigator.  
z Easy-PhotoPrint (Photo Printing)  
z ScanSoft OmniPage SE (Converting scanned document to text)*  
* This application software may not be supplied with this machine in some country.  
z Presto! PageManager (Organizing photos and documents)  
Scanning Images  
Chapter 7  
129  
Note  
If you did a [Custom Install] and only installed the MP Driver and MP Navigator, these  
application softwares were not installed and thus cannot be launched. To launch any of the  
above application software from MP Navigator, do a [Custom Install] once again to install  
them.  
For detailed operations of the MP Navigator, refer to the Scan Guide.  
Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine  
You can scan documents to your computer by using the Operation Panel on the machine.  
Important  
Do not insert or remove USB cables when scanning images with the machine connected to a  
computer, or when the computer is at sleep or standby mode.  
z If you are using Windows XP  
The program selection screen is displayed the first time you press [Color] or [Black] on the  
machine. Specify [MP Navigator 2.2] as the application software to use, check [Always use  
this program for this action], then click [OK]. From the next time, MP Navigator is  
automatically started.  
z If you are using Mac OS X  
For the machine to start scanning when [Color] or [Black] is pressed, you need to set MP  
Navigator as the starting application software in Image Capture under [Applications] of Mac  
OS X.  
Important  
z If you are using Mac OS X v.10.4, the settings below are not necessary.  
z Make sure that the MP Navigator is installed and that the Macintosh is connected to  
the machine before starting up Image Capture.  
If you are using Mac OS X v.10.3.x  
Select [Applications] from the [Go] menu, then double click [Image Capture]. Click  
[Options] at lower left of the scanner window, select [MP Navigator 2.2] from [Application to  
launch when scanner button is pressed], then click [OK]. Select [Quit Image Capture] from  
the [Image Capture] menu to exit Image Capture.  
Important  
If you select [Preferences] from the [Image Capture] menu, click [Scanner], and mark  
[Use TWAIN software whenever possible], [Options] is not displayed. In this case, click  
[Use TWAIN software whenever possible] to uncheck the option, exit the Image Capture,  
then start it again.  
If you are using Mac OS X v.10.2.4 or later  
Select [Applications] from the [Go] menu, then double click [Image Capture]. Select  
[Preferences] from the [Image Capture] menu. Select [Others] from [When a scanner  
button is pressed, open], select [MP Navigator 2.2] from [Applications], then click [Open].  
Select [Quit Image Capture] from the [Image Capture] menu to exit Image Capture.  
1
2
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Load the document on the Platen Glass or the ADF.  
For details on how to load documents, see “Loading Documents” on page 20.  
Scanning Images  
130  
Chapter 7  
3
Select the scan operation.  
(1) Press [SCAN].  
The scan process selection screen is displayed.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the scan operation, then press [OK].  
Scan method select screen is displayed.  
Save to PC:  
The document is scanned and saved.  
Save as PDF file:  
Attach to E-mail:  
The document is scanned and stored as a PDF file.  
The document is scanned, and the image is attached to an e-mail  
using the e-mail application software.  
Open with application: The document is scanned and displayed on the registered  
application software.  
4
Select the scan method.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the scan method, then press [OK].  
Scan standby screen is displayed.  
Two-sided scan from  
ADF:  
Scans two-sided documents from the ADF.  
Scans one-sided documents from the ADF.  
Scans from the Platen Glass.  
One-sided scan from  
ADF:  
Scan from platen:  
5
Press [Color] or [Black].  
The document is scanned. The settings configured from MP Navigator apply when scanning.  
Important  
If with some types of original the position and size of the image is not scanned in correctly,  
please refer to "Selecting the Behavior of the Operation Panel with MP Navigator" in the Scan  
Guide (On-screen Manual) and change the MP Navigator [Document Type] and [Document  
Size] to match those of the original being scanned.  
Scanning Images  
Chapter 7  
131  
Note  
z The operation to be performed after scanning the document depends on the scan  
operation setting you have selected in step 3. For details on how to modify the operation  
settings, refer to the Scan Guide.  
z A computer error may have occurred if scanning does not start after the button is pressed,  
check the error message displayed on the computer and take the corresponding  
countermeasure.  
z When you press [Stop/Reset] while scanning, the computer displays an error message.  
Close this message.  
Scanning from an Application Software  
You can scan an image from a TWAIN- or WIA- (Windows XP only) compliant application  
software and handle the scanned image in the application software. For detailed operations,  
refer to the Scan Guide.  
Scanning Images  
132  
Chapter 7  
Chapter 8  
Reading from and Writing to a Memory  
Card  
Setting up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of  
the Computer  
The Card Slot of the machine can also be used as the memory card drive of the computer.  
Important  
When <Read/write attribute> under <Device settings> is set to <Read/write mode> using the  
Operation Panel of the machine, card direct printing cannot be done. After using the Card Slot as the  
memory card drive of the computer, remove the memory card, then be sure to set <Read/write  
attribute> to <Read-only mode>.  
1
2
Display the Read/write attribute screen.  
(1) Ensure that the memory card is not set.  
If the memory card is set, remove it from the Card Slot. See “Inserting the Memory Card”  
on page 54.  
(2) Press [Menu].  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Maintenance/settings> and then press [OK].  
(4) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Device settings> and then press [OK].  
(5) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Other settings> and then press [OK].  
(6) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Read/write attribute> and then press [OK].  
Specify the Read/write attribute.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to specify <Read/write attribute>.  
Read-only mode:  
Read/write mode:  
The Card Slot is used only for reading. Be sure to select this  
mode when printing photos from a memory card.  
The Card Slot is used as the memory card drive of the  
computer. Photo data can be written into the memory card.  
(2) Press [OK].  
Note  
When using the Card Slot as the memory card drive of the computer, the removal operation  
from the computer is needed before removing the memory card from the machine.  
Right-click the removable disk icon and click [Eject]. If [Eject] is not displayed on the screen,  
ensure that the Access Lamp is not flashing and remove the memory card.  
Be sure to drag the  
icon into the Trash.  
Reading from and Writing to a Memory Card  
Chapter 8  
133  
Chapter 9  
Changing the Machine Settings  
This section describes the procedure to change the settings in the Device settings screen, taking the  
steps to specify Extended copy amount as an example.  
1
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning the Machine ON and OFF” on page 18.  
2
3
Press [Menu].  
Display the Device settings screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Maintenance/settings>, then press [OK].  
The Maintenance/settings screen is displayed.  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Device settings>, then press [OK].  
The Device settings screen is displayed.  
(2)  
4
Select the menu.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the setting item, then press [OK].  
Example: select <Print settings>.  
The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.  
(1)  
Changing the Machine Settings  
134  
Chapter 9  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the menu, then press [OK].  
Example: select <Extended copy amount>.  
(2)  
5
Change the settings.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the setting item, then press [OK].  
Example: select <Small>.  
(1)  
The Print Settings  
Quiet mode  
Use this function if you want to reduce the operation noise, such as when printing at night.  
Important  
z The printing speed may be reduced compared to when this setting is set to <OFF>.  
z This function may not be so effective depending on the print quality setting.  
z Furthermore, certain noise, such as when the machine is preparing for printing, is not  
reduced.  
Prevent paper abrasion  
Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged.  
Important  
Be sure to revert this setting to <OFF> after printing since it may result in lower print quality.  
Extended copy amount  
Selects the amount of image that extends off the paper when printing in Borderless (full).  
Note  
z This setting can be applied only when Copy mode selected.  
z If you set <Large> for this function, the area of the image extending off the paper becomes  
larger.  
Auto cont. feed switch  
If paper runs out in one paper source, paper will be fed from the other.  
Changing the Machine Settings  
Chapter 9  
135  
Important  
z This function only works when both paper sources are loaded with paper of the same size  
and type.  
z When printing from a computer, you need to set this feature with the printer driver. For  
details, refer to the Printer Driver Guide.  
z When printing from a computer, this feature can be used only when both paper sources are  
loaded with paper other than Credit Card- or Legal-sized paper.  
z In Copy mode or Memory card mode, this feature can be used only when both paper  
sources are loaded with paper other than Credit Card- or Legal-sized paper.  
z In Fax mode, this feature can be used only when both paper sources are loaded with A4-  
or Letter-sized plain paper.  
Two-sided output setting  
Sets the paper output setting for double-sided documents.  
Fax Settings  
Before changing any settings, you can print the User's data list to check the current settings  
of your machine. For details, see “Printing the User’s Data List” on page 105.  
Receive mode settings  
z FAX/TEL auto switch  
Sets the receive mode to <FAX/TEL auto switch>.  
z FAX only  
Sets the receive mode to <FAX only>.  
z Manual RX  
Sets the receive mode to <Manual RX>.  
z Ans. machine connect.  
Sets the receive mode to <Ans. machine connect.>.  
z DRPD  
Sets the receive mode to <DRPD>. This setting is only available in US and Canada.  
z Network switch  
Sets the receive mode to <Network switch>.  
Memory reference  
z Print memory list  
Lists the documents currently stored in the machine’s memory.  
z Print specified document  
Prints the specified document stored in the machine’s memory.  
Changing the Machine Settings  
136  
Chapter 9  
<Print first page only?>  
Selects pages to be printed.  
<Yes> prints only the first page of the document.  
<No> prints all the pages of the document.  
z Delete specified doc.  
Deletes the specified document stored in the machine’s memory.  
Print report/list  
z Activity report  
Shows recent fax transactions performed by the machine.  
z Telephone number list  
One-touch speed dial  
Lists the numbers and names registered for one-touch speed  
dialing.  
Coded speed dial  
Lists the numbers and names registered for coded dial speed  
dialing.  
<Print in order of name?>  
Sets the sorting order of the list. Select <Yes> to print the list  
with the destination names in alphabetical order. Select <No>  
to print the list with the registered entries in numerical order.  
Group dial  
Lists groups registered for group dialing.  
z User's data list  
Lists the current settings of the machine and the registered sender information.  
z Memory list  
Lists the documents currently stored in the machine’s memory.  
TEL number registration  
z One-touch speed dial  
Registers a fax/telephone number for one-touch speed dialing.  
z Coded speed dial  
Registers a fax/telephone number for coded speed dialing.  
z Group dial  
Registers a group of fax/telephone numbers for group dialing.  
Name  
Registers a one-touch or coded speed dialing number.  
Registers the fax/telephone number of the recipient.  
Member  
User settings  
z Date/time setting  
Sets the current date and time.  
Changing the Machine Settings  
Chapter 9  
137  
z Date display  
Sets the format of dates displayed on the LCD and printed on sent faxes.  
Three date formats are available; <YYYY/MM/DD>, <MM/DD/YYYY>, and <DD/MM/YYYY>.  
z Summer time setting  
Enables/disables the summer time setting.  
z Unit name/TEL registr.  
Registers the sender information (your name and fax/telephone number) printed on sent faxes.  
z TTI position  
Sets the sender information printed at the top of each fax page.  
TTI position  
Selects the position to print the sender information (outside or  
inside the image area).  
FAX/TEL number mark  
Selects the prefix inserted before the fax/telephone number  
(<FAX> or <TEL>).  
z Offhook alarm  
Sets whether to set off an alarm when the handset is off hook.  
z Volume control  
Adjusts the volume of the dialing sound.  
z RX ring level  
Adjusts the ring level when the machine receives a fax.  
z Telephone line type  
Specifies the type of telephone line connected to the machine (<Rotary pulse> or <Touch tone>).  
Note  
In New Zealand, select <Touch tone>. You cannot use <Rotary pulse>.  
z Activity report  
Sets whether to print the Activity report automatically after every 20 transactions.  
TX settings  
z ECM TX  
Enables/disables ECM sending.  
z Pause time  
Sets the length of time paused for each press of [Redial/Pause].  
Changing the Machine Settings  
138  
Chapter 9  
z Auto redial  
Enables/disables automatic redialing.  
Redial times  
Specifies the maximum number of redial attempts.  
Redial interval  
Specifies the length of time the machine waits between redial  
attempts.  
z TX start speed  
Selects the fax sending speed.  
z Color TX  
When faxing color documents using the ADF, selects whether to perform automatic black &  
white conversion if the recipient’s fax machine does not support color faxing.  
z TX report  
Sets whether to print a transmission report after each transmission.  
Attach TX image  
When <Print error only> or <Print for each TX> is selected,  
sets whether to print the first page of the document below the  
transmission report  
z Dial tone detect  
Sets whether to send faxes after detecting the dial tone. Select <ON> to enable this feature and  
avoid transmission errors caused when a fax transmission coincides with reception of an  
incoming call.  
RX settings  
z ECM RX  
Enables/disables ECM reception.  
z FAX/TEL auto switch  
Specifies the detailed settings when the receive mode is set to <FAX/TEL auto switch>.  
Ring start time  
Specifies the length of time to allow the machine to judge  
whether an incoming call is fax or a voice call.  
Telephone ring time  
Default action  
Specifies, in seconds, the time the machine rings for a voice  
call.  
Sets whether to receive the fax after the specified ring time  
has elapsed.  
z DRPD: Set FAX ring pat.  
Sets the distinctive ring pattern the machine gives off when you receive a fax call. If you  
subscribe to a DRPD service, set this to match the pattern assigned by your telephone company.  
This setting is only available in US and Canada.  
Changing the Machine Settings  
Chapter 9  
139  
z Incoming ring  
Sets whether to ring with an incoming call when the receive mode is set to <FAX only> or <FAX/  
TEL auto switch>. A telephone needs to be connected for the machine to ring.  
Ring count  
Specifies the number of times the machine rings when <ON>  
is selected.  
z Manual/auto switch  
Sets, when the receive mode is set to <Manual RX> or <Ans. machine connect.>, whether to  
automatically receive faxes after the machine rang a specified length of time.  
RX start time  
Specifies the length of time until automatic reception is started  
when <ON> is selected.  
z Remote RX  
Enables/disables remote reception.  
Remote RX ID  
Specifies the remote reception ID when <ON> is selected.  
z RX image reduction  
Enables/disables automatic reduction of incoming faxes so that they fit in the selected paper.  
Image reduction direction Selects the image reduction direction when <ON> is selected.  
z RX start speed  
Selects the fax reception speed.  
z RX report  
Sets whether to print a reception report after each reception.  
Other Settings  
Read/write attribute  
Selects whether to allow data to be written onto memory cards from a computer.  
Important  
If you set this setting to <Read/write mode>, card direct printing cannot be done. After you  
finish operation of the memory card dedicated drive, be sure to revert this setting to <Read-  
only mode>.  
Volume control  
Selects the volume.  
z Keypad volume  
Selects the beep volume when pressing the buttons on the Operation Panel.  
z Alarm volume  
Selects the alarm volume.  
Changing the Machine Settings  
140  
Chapter 9  
Power save setting  
Specifies the time until Power saving is enabled.  
You can select from <5 minutes>, <15 minutes>, <1 hour> or <8 hours>. The initial value is set  
to <1 hour>.  
Country select  
Selects the country where you are using your machine.  
Note  
This setting may not be available depending on the country of purchase.  
Adjust contrast  
Use this to adjust the contrast of the LCD if it is too low or too high.  
Slide show setting  
Specifies the image display quality of the slide show.  
Note  
When <Image quality: Std> is selected, images are displayed at 5-second intervals. When  
<Image quality: High> is selected, images are displayed at different time intervals according  
to their resolutions.  
Language selection  
Changes the language for LCD messages.  
Reset setting  
Reverts all settings you made to the machine since purchase back to default. However, some data  
may not be erased, depending on the current usage state of your machine.  
Save settings  
Saves the settings for the Settings screen.  
Load settings  
Loads the settings for the Settings screen that were saved.  
Changing the Machine Settings  
Chapter 9  
141  
Chapter 10  
Routine Maintenance  
Replacing an Ink Tank  
When ink runs out, replace the ink tank. The machine will not print if the wrong type of ink tank is  
used, or if it is installed in the incorrect position.  
The machine uses the following ink tanks.  
Black: CLI-8BK  
Magenta: CLI-8M  
Black: PGI-5BK  
Yellow: CLI-8Y  
Cyan: CLI-8C  
Note  
z Be sure to install the ink tanks in the correct order. The proper arrangement from the left is  
Black , Black , Yellow , Magenta , Cyan  
.
z Should missing characters or white streaks appear despite sufficient ink levels, see “When  
Printing Becomes Faint or Colors are Incorrect” on page 148.  
Getting the Ink Level Information  
You can check the ink tank status by the ink tank lamp display. Open the Scanning Unit (Printer  
Cover) of the machine and check the ink tank lamp.  
When the ink level is low:  
The ink tank lamp flashes slowly (about three seconds). Prepare a new ink tank.  
...Repeats  
When ink has run out:  
The ink tank lamp flashes fast (about one second). Replace it with a new ink tank.  
...Repeats  
If an error message is displayed on the LCD, an ink tank error has occurred and the machine cannot  
continue to print. See “An Error Message is Displayed on the LCD” on page 161.  
Routine Maintenance  
142  
Chapter 10  
Knowing When to Replace Ink Tank  
It is important to identify the empty tank using the LCD and replace it.  
When Low Ink is Detected:  
is displayed.  
The message is displayed on the LCD when you start printing.  
Obtain a new ink tank.  
z To continue printing, select <Yes> and then press [OK].  
z To cancel printing, select <No> and then press [OK].  
Important  
If ink runs low while a fax is being received, the fax may be stored in memory without being printed.  
See “Documents Stored in Memory” on page 113.  
When Ink has Run Out:  
is displayed.  
z Press [OK] to resume printing with an empty ink tank. When printing is finished, replace the ink  
tank immediately. If you continue printing with an empty ink tank, it will be a cause of trouble.  
* Printing does not resume if any of the ink tanks are left uninstalled. Be sure to press [OK] with  
all the ink tanks installed.  
z Press [Stop/Reset] to cancel printing. Replace with a new ink tank.  
Replacing Ink Tanks  
When an ink tank runs out of ink, replace it using the following steps.  
Note  
z Do not replace the ink tank while scanning documents. If you open the Scanning Unit (Printer  
Cover) while scanning, the document may not be scanned properly.  
z To maintain optimal print quality, use an ink tank within six months of its first use.  
z Once an ink tank has been used, do not remove it from the machine and leave it out in the open.  
This will cause the ink tank to dry out and the machine may not operate properly if it is reinstalled.  
z Color ink consumption may occur even when black-and-white or grayscale printing is specified.  
Color ink is consumed in the head cleaning and deep cleaning, which are necessary to maintain  
the machine’s capabilities.  
Routine Maintenance  
Chapter 10  
143  
1
Open the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) and the Paper Output Tray.  
(1) Make sure the machine is turned on.  
(2) Raise the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) until it stops.  
* The Paper Output Tray will open automatically after the Print Head Holder moves to the  
center.  
(A)  
(A) Press the Open Button to open the Paper Output Tray if it does not open  
automatically.  
Caution  
Do not hold the LCD.  
Important  
If the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) is left open for more than 10 minutes, the Print Head  
Holder moves to the right. Close and reopen the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) to return the  
Print Head Holder to the center.  
2
Open the Inner Cover.  
Caution  
z Do not try to manually move or stop the Print Head Holder.  
z Do not touch any metal parts.  
Routine Maintenance  
144  
Chapter 10  
3
Remove the ink tank whose lamp is flashing fast.  
(1) Push the tab (A) and remove the ink tank.  
(B)  
(A)  
Caution  
Do not touch the Print Head Lock Lever (B). Remove only the ink tank.  
Important  
z Handle ink tanks carefully to avoid staining clothing or the surrounding area.  
z Discard empty ink tanks according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of  
consumables.  
Note  
Be sure to replace ink tanks one by one when replacing more than one ink tank.  
4
Prepare a replacement tank.  
(1) Remove the new ink tank from its packaging, then pull the orange tape (A) toward the  
arrow so that the protective film does not remain on the air hole (C). Then remove the film  
completely (B).  
(2) Remove the orange protective cap (D) from the bottom of the ink tank and discard it.  
Carefully hold the protective cap when removing it to prevent the ink from staining your  
fingers.  
Discard the cap once it is removed.  
(D)  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(E) (F) (G)  
Routine Maintenance  
Chapter 10  
145  
Important  
z Be sure to remove the clear film from the ink tank in the exact order shown in step 5, as  
failure to follow this step may cause the ink to leak and stain your clothes and hands.  
z Do not touch the electrical contacts (G). Doing so can cause the machine to malfunction or  
become unable to print.  
z Do not squeeze the side of ink tanks (F) as this may cause the ink to leak out and stain  
your clothes and hands.  
z Do not re-attach the protective cap (D) once you have removed it.  
z Do not touch the open ink port (E) once the protective cap is removed, as this may prevent  
the ink from being ejected properly.  
z Ink on the removed protective cap may stain your clothes and hands.  
z Ensure that all the orange tape has been peeled off along the perforation. If there remains  
a part of the orange tape, ink may not be ejected correctly.  
5
Install the ink tank.  
(1) Install the ink tank into the Print Head.  
Note  
Refer to the guide label (A) and insert the ink tank in the correct position.  
(2) Press on the  
mark on the ink tank until the ink tank snaps firmly into place.  
(3) Ensure that the ink tank clicks into place and then its lamp lights red (B).  
(A)  
(B)  
Important  
Make sure to install all the ink tanks to enable printing. The machine cannot be used unless  
all the ink tanks are installed.  
Routine Maintenance  
146  
Chapter 10  
6
Close the Inner Cover.  
Note  
Ensure that the Inner Cover is closed. Printing will not occur if the Inner Cover is open.  
7
Slowly close the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover).  
Caution  
z Be sure to hold the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) firmly using both hands, and be careful  
not to get your fingers caught.  
z Do not hold the LCD.  
Note  
z If <Some ink tanks are not installed in place.> is displayed on the LCD after the Scanning  
Unit (Printer Cover) is closed, some ink tanks may be installed in the wrong positions.  
Open the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) and make sure that all the ink tanks are installed in  
the correct order directed on the label.  
z When you start printing after replacing the ink tank, the machine executes Print Head  
cleaning automatically. Do not perform any other operations until the Print Head cleaning  
finishes.  
Keeping the Best Printing Results  
z When unplugging the power cord  
When unplugging the power cord, be sure to press [ON/OFF] first. When you press [ON/OFF],  
the Print Head is protected by the cap to prevent the ink from drying. When unplugging the  
power cord, be sure to unplug it after turning OFF the machine with [ON/OFF].  
z When not using the machine for a long time  
When not using the machine for a long time, print or copy in both black & white and in color, or  
perform Print Head cleaning, about once a month to prevent degradation of the Print Head.  
Numerous nozzles are installed in the Print Head for high-precision printing. Just as the  
uncapped tip of a ballpoint pen or marker becomes dry and unusable if not used for a long period  
of time, the Print Head nozzles become blocked by dried ink. Periodically printing or cleaning the  
Print Head can prevent this blockage.  
Note  
If the printed area is traced with a highlight pen or paint-stick or stained with water or sweat,  
ink may blur depending on the paper.  
Routine Maintenance  
Chapter 10  
147  
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors are Incorrect  
When printing becomes faint or colors are incorrect, even if ink remains in the ink tanks, the Print  
Head nozzles are probably clogged. Follow the procedures below to clean the nozzles.  
If the ruled lines are shifted after running the Print Head maintenance, align the Print Head.  
Note  
Before printing the nozzle check pattern or cleaning the Print Head, check the following;  
– Open the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover), and make sure that all the ink tanks click into place and  
then their lamps light red.  
– If any one of the lamps is flashing, the associated ink tank is empty or running low. See “Getting  
the Ink Level Information” on page 142.  
If an ink tank lamp is flashing even though ink remains in that ink tank, it is inserted in the wrong  
position. Make sure that the correct ink tank color is inserted in each position. Open the  
Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) and make sure all the ink tank lamps are lit. See “Replacing an  
Ink Tank” on page 142.  
– If the ink tank lamp is unlit, press the  
mark on the ink tank firmly until it clicks to fully insert  
it. Make sure that all packaging material is peeled off the ink tank. See “Replacing Ink Tanks” on  
page 143.  
After Print Head  
Step 1  
See “Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern” on page 149  
cleaning, print the  
nozzle check  
pattern.  
If missing lines or white stripes appear  
Step 2  
See “Print Head Cleaning” on page 151  
If the problem remains after performing Print Head  
cleaning twice  
Step 3  
See “Print Head Deep Cleaning” on page 152  
Note  
If Print Head Deep cleaning does not resolve the problem, contact the Canon Customer Care  
Center.  
z If the ruled lines are shifted  
Step 1  
See “Aligning Print Head automatically” on page 153  
Routine Maintenance  
148  
Chapter 10  
Performing Maintenance  
1
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning the Machine ON and OFF” on page 18.  
2
3
Press [Menu].  
Display the Maintenance screen.  
(1) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Maintenance/settings>, then press [OK].  
The Maintenance/settings screen is displayed.  
(1)  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Maintenance>, then press [OK].  
The Maintenance screen is displayed.  
(2)  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select the setting item, then press [OK].  
The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.  
(3)  
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern  
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the Print Head  
nozzles and to verify Print Head alignment. Use this function when printed results are blurred or  
the color is incorrect.  
Note  
Ensure that the Inner Cover is closed.  
1
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine, then load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized  
plain paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder or the Cassette.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18 and “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
Routine Maintenance  
Chapter 10  
149  
2
3
Use [Feed Switch] to select the paper source where you have loaded paper.  
Printing the nozzle check pattern.  
(1) Display the Maintenance screen.  
See “Performing Maintenance” on page 149.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Nozzle check> and then press [OK].  
The pattern print confirmation screen is displayed.  
(2)  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes> and then press [OK].  
The nozzle check pattern is printed.  
(3)  
4
Examine the pattern and take the appropriate action.  
See “Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern” on page 150.  
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern  
Examine the nozzle check pattern. Perform cleaning if necessary.  
Note  
If the ink level is low, the nozzle check pattern is not printed correctly. Replace the relevant ink  
tank. (See “Replacing an Ink Tank” on page 142.)  
(1)  
(2)  
(1) Examine if any missing lines exist on this pattern.  
Routine Maintenance  
150  
Chapter 10  
(2) Examine if any white stripes exist on this pattern.  
The two different pattern sets will be displayed by turns for the pattern confirmation screen on  
the LCD.  
z There are no white stripes./All the patterns are printed normally.  
(1) Select <All A> and press [OK].  
The screen returns to the Maintenance screen.  
(1)  
z When a white stripe exists on any of the printed patterns  
(1) Select <Also B> and press [OK].  
The cleaning confirmation screen is displayed.  
(2) Select <Yes> and press [OK] to start Print Head cleaning.  
See “Print Head Cleaning” on page 151.  
(2)  
Print Head Cleaning  
Clean the Print Head if missing lines or white stripes appear in the nozzle check pattern. This  
unclogs the nozzles to restore the Print Head condition. Note that cleaning the Print Head  
causes waste ink to be absorbed in the waste ink absorber. Cleaning the Print Head consumes  
ink, so perform Print Head cleaning only when necessary.  
Note  
Ensure that the Inner Cover is closed.  
1
2
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Clean the Print Head.  
(1) Display the Maintenance screen.  
See “Performing Maintenance” on page 149.  
Routine Maintenance  
Chapter 10  
151  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Cleaning> and then press [OK].  
The confirmation screen is displayed.  
(2)  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes> and then press [OK].  
The machine starts the Print Head cleaning.  
(3)  
Important  
Do not perform any other operations until the Print Head cleaning finishes. This takes about  
50 seconds.  
3
Check the status of the Print Head.  
After Print Head cleaning finishes, the nozzle check confirmation screen is displayed. Print  
the nozzle check pattern to verify that the Print Head nozzles are clean. See “Printing the  
Nozzle Check Pattern” on page 149.  
Note  
If you perform cleaning and nozzle check twice and the result does not improve, then perform  
Deep cleaning.  
See “Print Head Deep Cleaning” on page 152.  
Print Head Deep Cleaning  
If print quality does not improve by standard Print Head cleaning, try Print Head deep cleaning,  
which is a more powerful process. Print Head deep cleaning consumes more ink than standard  
print head cleaning, so perform this procedure only when necessary.  
Note  
Ensure that the Inner Cover is closed.  
1
2
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Perform deep cleaning of the Print Head.  
(1) Display the Maintenance screen.  
See “Performing Maintenance” on page 149.  
Routine Maintenance  
152  
Chapter 10  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Deep cleaning> and then press [OK].  
The confirmation screen is displayed.  
(2)  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes> and then press [OK].  
The machine starts the Print Head deep cleaning.  
(3)  
Important  
The process takes about 90 seconds to complete, so simply wait until the Alarm Lamp stops  
flashing.  
3
Check the status of the Print Head.  
(1) Print the nozzle check pattern to verify that the Print Head nozzles are clean.  
See “Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern” on page 149.  
When one specific color only does not print, see “Replacing an Ink Tank” on page 142.  
(2) If the problem remains, turn off the machine’s power for at least 24 hours, and perform  
deep cleaning of the Print Head again.  
(3) If the problem still remains, the Print Head may be damaged. Contact the Canon  
Customer Care Center  
Aligning Print Head automatically  
If the ruled lines are shifted after running the Print Head maintenance, align the Print Head.  
There are two ways to align the Print Head, automatic or manual. First, try adjusting the Print  
Head automatically. If the automatic Print Head alignment does not work or if you wish, you can  
adjust the Print Head manually. See “Adjusting the Print Head Manually” on page 165.  
Note  
z The Cassette does not feed paper for aligning the Print Head. Load paper in the Auto  
Sheet Feeder.  
z Ensure that the Inner Cover is closed.  
1
2
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Execute automatic Print Head alignment.  
(1) Display the Maintenance screen.  
See “Performing Maintenance” on page 149.  
Routine Maintenance  
Chapter 10  
153  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Auto head align> and then press [OK].  
The confirmation screen is displayed.  
Note  
Select <Head alignment print> to print the current adjustment values.  
(2)  
(3) Load two sheets of A4- or Letter-sized plain paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
(4) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes> and then press [OK].  
A pattern is printed and the Print Head is automatically aligned. It takes about five  
minutes until printing completes.  
(4)  
Note  
z The pattern is printed in black and blue.  
When Automatic Print Head Alignment Cannot Be Executed Correctly  
z When automatic Print Head alignment cannot be executed correctly, the message “Auto  
head align has failed.” is displayed on the LCD.  
See “An Error Message is Displayed on the LCD” on page 161.  
Cleaning Your Machine  
This section describes the necessary cleaning procedures for your machine.  
Caution  
z Be sure to turn OFF the power and disconnect the power cord before cleaning the machine.  
z Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning. Paper tissue powders or  
fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause problems such as a blocked Print Head  
and poor printing results. Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.  
z Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to  
clean the machine; these can damage the machine’s components.  
Routine Maintenance  
154  
Chapter 10  
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover  
Wipe the Platen Glass (D), the inner side of the Document Cover (white area) (C), the glass of  
the ADF (A), and the inner side of the ADF (white area) (B) with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth  
moistened with water. Then wipe with a clean, soft, dry, lint-free cloth making sure not to leave  
any residue, especially on the Platen Glass. If you have trouble getting the scanning area clean,  
wipe with diluted mild detergent (for dish washing).  
Important  
The sheet (C) is easily damaged, so wipe it gently.  
(B)  
(C)  
(A)  
(D)  
Cleaning The ADF  
1
Open the Document Tray.  
2
Open the Feeder Cover.  
Routine Maintenance  
Chapter 10  
155  
3
With a soft, clean, lint-free and dry cloth, wipe off any paper dust from the inside of  
the Feeder Cover as illustrated by gray colored part.  
4
5
6
After wiping, close the Feeder Cover by pushing it until it clicks into place.  
Close the Document Tray.  
Reconnect the power cord then turn ON the power.  
Cleaning the Roller (Roller Cleaning)  
Clean the paper feed rollers if paper is not fed properly. Cleaning the paper feed rollers will wear  
the rollers, so perform this only when necessary.  
Note  
Ensure that the Inner Cover is closed.  
1
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine, then remove any paper from the Auto  
Sheet Feeder and Cassette.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Use [Feed Switch] to select the paper source to clean.  
Clean the paper feed rollers.  
2
3
(1) Display the Maintenance screen.  
See “Performing Maintenance” on page 149.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Roller cleaning>, then press [OK].  
The confirmation screen is displayed.  
(2)  
Routine Maintenance  
156  
Chapter 10  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
The paper feed rollers are cleaned.  
(3)  
4
5
Repeat step 3 twice.  
Load three or more of A4- or Letter-sized paper in the paper source you selected in  
step 2.  
6
Repeat step 3 three times.  
The sheet of paper is automatically fed in and then out of the machine.  
If there are no signs of improvement after performing three times, contact the Canon  
Customer Care Center.  
Cleaning the Interior of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)  
This section describes how to clean the interior of the machine. If the interior of the machine  
becomes dirty, paper printed onto by the machine may get dirty, so we recommend performing  
cleaning regularly.  
Note  
Ensure that the Inner Cover is closed.  
1
2
Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine, then remove any paper from the Auto  
Sheet Feeder.  
See “Turning on the Machine” on page 18.  
Prepare a single sheet of A4- or Letter-sized plain paper. Fold it in half along the  
long edge. Unfold the paper, then load it in the Auto Sheet Feeder with the open  
side to the front.  
Routine Maintenance  
Chapter 10  
157  
3
Perform bottom plate cleaning.  
(1) Display the Maintenance screen.  
See “Performing Maintenance” on page 149.  
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Bottom plate cleaning>, then press [OK].  
The confirmation screen is displayed.  
(2)  
(3) Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
The sheet of paper is automatically fed in and then out of the machine.  
If the printed paper is smudged, clean the inside of the machine again.  
If the problem remains after performing cleaning again, the protrusions inside the  
machine may be stained. Clean them up. See “Cleaning the Protrusions inside the  
Machine” on page 158.  
(3)  
Important  
z Even if the Cassette is selected as the paper source, paper will be fed from the Auto Sheet  
Feeder to print the pattern.  
z Do not perform any other operation while the bottom plate is being cleaned.  
Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine  
If protrusions inside the machine are stained, wipe ink off the protrusions using a swab or the  
like.  
Routine Maintenance  
158  
Chapter 10  
Chapter 11  
Troubleshooting  
This section describes troubleshooting tips for problems you may encounter when using the  
machine.  
Note  
This section describes about error messages that are displayed on the LCD or troubleshooting tips  
for the problems of copy direct printing. If you cannot find appropriate tips for your problem, refer to  
the on-screen manuals.  
z “If the Power Disconnects Unexpectedly” on page 161  
z “An Error Message is Displayed on the LCD” on page 161  
z “Cannot See the Display Properly on the LCD/Cannot See the Display on the LCD” on page 166  
z “Ink Does Not Come Out/Printing is Blurred/Colors are Wrong/White Streaks/Straight Lines are  
Misaligned/Cannot Print to End of Job” on page 166  
z “When Copying” on page 169  
z “Back of Paper is Smudged/Paper Does Not Feed Properly/Printed Surface is Scratched” on  
page 170  
z “Paper Curls/Ink Blots” on page 174  
z “Paper Jams” on page 174  
z “Document Jams” on page 177  
z “Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet” on page 178  
z “Cannot Print Properly from the Digital Camera” on page 179  
z “Cannot Install the MP Drivers” on page 181  
z “Cannot Connect to the Computer Properly” on page 183  
z “Printing Speed is Slow / USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Connection Does Not Work” on page 183  
z “When You Connect to a Computer Running Windows XP, the Screen Shows the Warning  
Message “This device can perform faster” or “High-SPEED USB Device Plugged into non-  
High-SPEED USB Hub”” on page 183  
z “Problems Receiving Faxes” on page 183  
z “Cannot Receive a Fax” on page 183  
z “Cannot Print a Fax” on page 184  
z “Cannot Receive Faxes Automatically” on page 185  
z “Machine Does Not Switch Automatically between Voice and Fax Calls” on page 185  
z “Quality of Received Fax is Poor” on page 185  
z “Repeated Errors Occur When You Receive a Fax” on page 186  
z “Problems Sending Faxes” on page 186  
z “Cannot Send a Fax” on page 186  
z “Cannot Send a Fax Clearly” on page 187  
z “Repeated Errors Occur When You Send a Fax” on page 187  
z Telephone Problems” on page 187  
z “Cannot Dial” on page 187  
z Telephone Disconnects During a Call” on page 187  
z “Problems Scanning” on page 188  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
159  
z “Scanner won’t work” on page 188  
z “ScanGear MP won’t start” on page 188  
z “Cannot display preview” on page 188  
z “Computer stops operating during scanning” on page 188  
z “Scan quality is poor (Poor image displayed on the monitor)” on page 189  
z “Parts of image missing or surrounded by extra white areas” on page 189  
z “Trouble scanning with Multi-Scan or Multi-Crop function” on page 190  
z “Slow scanning speed” on page 190  
z ““There is not enough memory.” message is displayed” on page 190  
z “Scanned image not displayed properly” on page 191  
z “Trouble scanning with MP Navigator” on page 191  
z “Image position and size incorrect when scanning from the machine's operation panel” on  
page 191  
z “Scanned image is slanted although document is set properly” on page 191  
z “Scanned image is rotated although document is set properly” on page 191  
z “An Error Message Appears on the Screen” on page 192  
z “Service Error 5100 is Displayed” on page 192  
z “Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error” on page 192  
z “When an Error is Displayed Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing” on page 193  
z “Error No.: 300 is Displayed” on page 193  
z “Error No.: 1700 is Displayed” on page 194  
z “Error No.: 1851 is Displayed” on page 194  
z “Error No.: 1856 is Displayed” on page 194  
z “Error No.: 2001 is Displayed” on page 195  
z “Error No.: 2500 is Displayed” on page 195  
z “For Windows Users” on page 195  
Troubleshooting  
160  
Chapter 11  
If an error occurs when the machine is connected to a computer  
When an error occurs in printing such as the printer is out of paper or paper jams, a troubleshooting  
message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message.  
The message may vary depending on the version of your Windows operating system.  
If the Power Disconnects Unexpectedly  
If there is a power failure or if you accidentally disconnect the power cord, the date/time settings as  
well as all documents stored in memory will be lost. User data and speed dialing settings are  
retained. If the power disconnects, the following will apply:  
z You will not be able to send or receive faxes or make copies.  
z If a telephone is connected to the machine, you can receive voice calls.  
z Whether you are able to make voice calls depends on the type of your telephone.  
An Error Message is Displayed on the LCD  
An error message is displayed on the LCD, take the corresponding countermeasure described  
below.  
Message  
Action  
There are no photos in memory  
card.  
z There are only invalid images on the memory card.  
z Photo data edited/processed on the computer should be printed from  
the computer, not from the camera.  
Ink has run out. Replace the ink tank The ink has run out (The lamp on the ink tank flashes).  
and close the cover.  
Replace the ink tank, and close the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover).  
U041  
If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing, press [OK]  
with the ink tank installed. Then printing can continue under the ink out  
condition. Replace the empty ink tank immediately after the printing. The  
machine may be damaged if printing is continued under the ink out  
condition.  
Note  
If multiple ink tank lamps are flashing red, check how fast they flash. Fast  
flashing (at about one second interval) indicates the ink is empty. Slow  
flashing (at about three second interval) indicates ink is low. For details on  
different flashing speeds, see “Knowing When to Replace Ink Tank” on  
page 143.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
161  
Message  
Action  
Print head is not installed./The type  
of print head is incorrect.  
Follow the directions given in the Easy Setup Instructions to install the  
Print Head.  
If the Print Head is already installed, remove the Print Head and reinstall it.  
If this error still remains, the Print Head may be damaged. Contact the  
Canon Customer Care Center.  
Inner cover is open. Close the inner If the Inner Cover is open when starting normal printing, close it before  
cover and press [OK].  
pressing [OK] on the machine.  
Do not open or close the Inner Cover when printing. This may damage the  
machine.  
Some ink tanks are not installed in  
place.  
Possible causes are as follows:  
z Some ink tanks are not installed in place.  
z More than one ink tanks of the same color are installed.  
U072  
More than one ink tank of the  
following color is installed.  
Confirm that the ink tanks are installed in the appropriate positions. See  
“Replacing an Ink Tank” on page 142.  
U071  
The waste ink absorber is almost  
Ink used for cleaning is absorbed in a waste ink absorber placed in the  
full. Press [OK] to continue but early machine.  
replacement recommended. <See  
manual>  
Press [OK] to cancel the error so that you can continue printing. Once the  
waste ink absorber becomes completely full, printing cannot be done until  
the waste ink absorber is replaced.  
Canon recommends to contact the Canon Customer Care Center as soon  
as possible. You will need to replace a particular part of the machine.  
The following ink tank cannot be  
recognized.  
Possible causes are as follows:  
z The ink tank may not be installed properly (The lamp on the ink tank is  
off). Install the appropriate ink tank.  
U140  
U043  
z The ink tank may not be compatible with this machine (The lamp on the  
ink tank is off). Install the appropriate ink tank. See “Replacing an Ink  
Tank” on page 142.  
The following ink tank cannot be  
recognized.  
z Ink tank errors have occurred (The lamp on the ink tank is off).  
Replace the ink tank.  
U150  
See “Replacing an Ink Tank” on page 142.  
z The ink tank that is not supported by this machine is installed (The  
lamp on the ink tank is off).  
Install the appropriate ink tank.  
See “Replacing an Ink Tank” on page 142.  
The remaining level of the following An ink tank that was once empty is installed.  
ink cannot be correctly detected.  
Replace the ink tank.  
U130  
Printing under the situation may damage the Print Head.  
Canon shall not be liable for any machine malfunction or damage caused  
by refilled ink tanks.  
If you want to continue printing with the refilled ink tank installed, press  
and hold [Stop/Reset] for at least 5 seconds, and then release it. Using  
refilled ink tanks are memorized.  
* This operation will release the function for detecting the remaining ink  
level.  
Troubleshooting  
162  
Chapter 11  
Message  
Action  
Incompatible device detected.  
Disconnect the camera cable, and reconnect it.  
Depending on the model or brand of your device, you may have to select a  
print mode compliant with PictBridge before connecting the camera.  
You may also have to turn on the camera or select Play mode manually  
after connecting the camera to the machine. Perform necessary  
operations according to the instruction manual supplied with your  
camera.  
If the error is still unresolved, there is a possibility that you are using a  
digital camera or digital video camcorder that is not supported by this  
machine. Use a digital camera or digital video camcorder compatible with  
this machine.  
Auto head align has failed.  
z A4/Letter-sized paper is not loaded on the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
Press [OK] on the machine to clear the error, then load two sheets of  
A4/Letter-sized paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
Automatic Print Head alignment cannot be performed using paper from  
the Cassette. For automatic Print Head alignment, always load paper in  
the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
z Print Head nozzles are clogged. Press [OK] to resolve the error. Print  
the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the Print Head.  
z The Paper Output Slot has been exposed to a strong light source  
preventing current Print Head alignment. Press [OK] to resolve the  
error. Align the Print Head so the Paper Output Slot will not be exposed  
directly to a strong light source.  
After carrying out the above measures, if the problem continues after  
aligning the Print Head again, press [OK] to resolve the error, and then  
perform manual Print Head alignment. For details on manual Print Head  
alignment, see “Adjusting the Print Head Manually” on page 165.  
****  
An error requiring servicing might have occurred. Turn off the machine,  
and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. After a  
while, plug the power cord of the machine back in, turn on the machine,  
and then reconnect the camera to the machine. If the same error occurs,  
contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Error code  
Scanner is not operating correctly.  
Turn OFF the machine then remove the plug from the outlet. Wait a while,  
and then try restoring the power. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Release the scanner lock switch and The Scanner Lock Switch is not released. Slide the Scanner Lock Switch  
turn the power off and back on.  
to the release position  
turn the power back on.  
, press [ON/OFF] to turn the machine off. Then,  
If this error still remains, contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Document in ADF. Redo operation The document is jammed in the ADF. Remove the document page jammed  
after checking document in ADF and in the ADF, then press [OK]. When the error is cleared, redo the operation.  
pressing [OK].  
See “Document Jams” on page 177.  
Document size is too long. Redo  
operation after checking document  
on ADF and pressing [OK].  
The document is too long or is jammed in the ADF. Remove the document  
page jammed in the ADF, then press [OK]. When the error is cleared, make  
sure that the document you are loading meets the machine's requirements  
before redoing the operation. See “Document Requirements” on page 19  
and “Document Jams” on page 177.  
Document size not suitable for two- Two-sided scanning can be used only for A4- or Letter-sized documents.  
sided scanning. Press [OK] to  
cancel operation and discharge  
document.  
Press [OK] to discharge the document, and rescan the document one side  
at a time.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
163  
Message  
Action  
This group dial cannot be used.  
Coded dial *##  
You dialed a coded speed dialing number in which a group is registered  
either with [Hook] pressed.  
A coded speed dialing number in which a group is registered cannot be  
dialed in such ways.  
This group dial cannot be used.  
One-touch ##  
You dialed a one-touch speed dialing number in which a group is  
registered either with [Hook] pressed.  
A one-touch speed dialing number in which a group is registered cannot  
be dialed in such ways.  
Auto redial  
The machine is waiting to redial the recipient’s number because the line  
was busy or the recipient did not answer when you tried to send a  
document. Wait for the machine to automatically redial the number. If you  
want to cancel automatic redialing, wait until the machine starts dialing  
the number, press [Stop/Reset], then follow the instructions on the LCD.  
You can also delete the document from memory. See “Printing or Deleting  
a Document in Memory” on page 114.  
Hang up the phone.  
The handset is not placed in the handset cradle correctly. Replace the  
handset correctly.  
Try again in black & white.  
The recipient’s fax machine is not color-compatible. Press [Black] to  
resend the faxes. Alternatively, you can set <Color TX> to <Send in black  
& white>.  
Failed to connect.  
The telephone line cable with a modular plug is not plugged in properly, or  
<Dial tone detect> is set to <ON>. Make sure that the cable is plugged in  
properly, and resend the fax after a while. If you still cannot send the fax,  
set <Dial tone detect> to <OFF>.  
Received in memory.  
The machine was not able to print the received fax, either because the  
paper size setting is incorrect or the ink is running low or has run out, and  
the fax is stored in memory.  
Correct the paper settings (see “Changing the Print Settings” on page 37)  
or replace the ink tank (see “Replacing an Ink Tank” on page 142) and then  
print the fax from memory. (See “Printing or Deleting a Document in  
Memory” on page 114.)  
Busy/no signal  
z The telephone number you dialed is busy.  
Try dialing again after waiting for a moment. See “Redialing a Busy  
Number” on page 112.  
z The fax number dialed was incorrect.  
Check the fax number and dial again.  
z The recipient’s fax machine is not working.  
Contact the recipient and have them check their fax machine.  
z The recipient is not using a G3 machine.  
Contact the recipient and ask them to send or receive the document  
using a G3 machine.  
z The touch tone/rotary pulse setting on your machine is incorrect.  
Set your machine to the setting that matches your telephone line. See  
“Setting the Telephone Line Type” on page 81.  
z The receiving fax machine did not answer within 55 seconds (after all  
automatic redialing attempts).  
Contact the recipient and have them check their fax machine. For an  
overseas call, add pauses to the registered number.  
Memory is full.  
The machine’s memory is full because it has received too many  
documents, or a very long or detailed document.  
Contact the sender and have him/her divide and resend them.  
Troubleshooting  
164  
Chapter 11  
Message  
Action  
The paper size is not correct.  
Change the page size you have set.  
The paper size setting is set to a size other than <A4>, <8.5" x 11">, or  
<8.5" x 14">.  
Reset the paper size in the Settings screen. When feeding from the Auto  
Sheet Feeder, set it to <A4>, <8.5" x 11">, or <8.5" x 14">. When feeding  
from the cassette, set it to <A4> or <8.5" x 11">.  
Change the paper. A4/8.5x11/8.5x14  
Plain  
Change the paper. A4/8.5x11 Plain  
paper  
*[##] represents a two-digit figure.  
Note  
Adjusting the Print Head Manually  
If the Automatic Print Head Alignment does not work or if you wish to adjust the print heads  
manually, follow the procedure below.  
1. Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine, and then load two sheets of A4/Letter-sized  
plain paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder or Cassette. See “Turning the Machine ON and  
OFF” on page 18, and “Loading Paper” on page 22.  
2. Ensure that the proper paper source is selected.  
3. Display the Maintenance screen.  
4. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Manual head align>, then press [OK].  
5. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, then press [OK].  
The Print Head alignment pattern is printed.  
6. When <Did the patterns print correctly?> is displayed, confirm that the pattern is printed  
correctly, use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes>, and then press [OK].  
The input screen for the head position adjustment value is displayed.  
7. Check the printed patterns and use [ ] or [ ] to input the number of the pattern in  
column A that has the least noticeable streaks.  
8. Press [ ] to move the cursor to column B, and then use [ ] or [ ] to input the  
number of the pattern that has the least noticeable streaks.  
9. Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column P.  
10.When you have finished inputting all pattern numbers, press [OK].  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
165  
Cannot See the Display Properly on the LCD/Cannot  
See the Display on the LCD  
Cause  
Action  
Cannot see the display properly on  
the LCD/The display on the LCD is  
illegible.  
Adjust the contrast of the LCD in the <Adjust contrast> menu in the  
<Maintenance/settings>. See “Changing the Machine Settings” on  
page 134.  
Cannot see the display on the LCD.  
z The machine is not powered on.  
The machine will power ON and the LCD will display a message when  
you connect the power cord and press [ON/OFF].  
z The LCD may be in the screen-saver mode.  
On the Operation Panel, press a button other than [ON/OFF].  
Ink Does Not Come Out/Printing is Blurred/Colors are  
Wrong/White Streaks/Straight Lines are Misaligned/  
Cannot Print to End of Job  
Cause  
Action  
Ink tank is empty.  
If the ink tank lamp is flashing, ink is empty. Replace the ink tank, and  
close the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover).  
If printing is not finished yet, just press [OK] on the machine to continue  
printing in the “no ink” state.  
Replace the ink tank with a new one as soon as possible after printing has  
finished. The machine may be damaged if printing is continued under the  
ink out condition.  
Note  
If multiple ink tank lamps are flashing, check how fast they flash. Fast  
flashing (about one second) indicates the ink is empty. Slow flashing  
(about three seconds) indicates ink is low. For details on different flashing  
speeds, see “Getting the Ink Level Information” on page 142.  
Ink tank is not fully inserted.  
When the ink tank lamp is unlit, press the mark on the ink tank clicks  
into place. The ink tank lamp lights red when the ink tank is fully inserted.  
Make sure all of the orange tape is peeled off the ink tank as illustrated in  
(A). If any orange parts are left like in (B), remove all of the orange parts.  
(A)  
(B)  
(A) Correct  
An L shaped notch appears on the ink tank.  
(B) Incorrect  
There remains the orange tape. Peel off the tape completely along the  
perforation.  
If ink tank is empty, replace the ink tank.  
Troubleshooting  
166  
Chapter 11  
Cause  
Action  
Incorrect media type  
When printing directly from a digital camera, on the Operation Panel,  
confirm that the <Media type> selected matches the paper loaded.  
When printing from a computer, check the following.  
On the [Main] tab of the printer driver, ensure that the [Media Type]  
selected matches the paper loaded.  
In the [Print] dialog box of the printer driver, select [Quality & Media] from  
the pop-up menu, and then ensure that the [Media Type] selected matches  
the paper loaded.  
Print Head nozzles clogged or  
shifted  
Open the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) and check if all ink tanks lamps  
light red.  
Print the nozzle check pattern to check for uneven ink output.  
See “Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern” on page 149.  
z Ink supply is uneven.  
See “Print Head Cleaning” on page 151.  
See “Print Head Deep Cleaning” on page 152.  
z If straight lines are shifted.  
See “Aligning Print Head automatically” on page 153.  
Print quality is not set properly.  
Be sure to set the [Print Quality] setting to [High] in Windows, or [Fine] in  
Macintosh.  
1. Open the printer properties dialog box.  
2. On the [Main] tab, click [High] for the [Print Quality] setting.  
When you cannot choose the [High] setting or when the print quality does  
not improve, select [Custom], click [Set] and then adjust the Quality bar  
for higher print quality.  
1. Open the [Print] dialog box.  
2. Select [Quality & Media] from the pop-up menu and then click [Detailed  
Setting].  
3. Drag the [Print Quality] slide bar to the [Fine] end.  
The media is loaded with the wrong Load the media with the correct side facing upwards.  
side facing upwards.  
The paper stack exceeds the If the paper stack exceeds the paper limit mark, or exceeds the capacity of  
capacity of the Auto Sheet Feeder or the Auto Sheet Feeder or Cassette, reduce the amount of paper. See  
Cassette.  
“Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
There is some foreign matter in the  
Auto Sheet Feeder or Cassette.  
Check and remove any foreign matter.  
The paper source is not configured  
properly.  
Make sure that the paper source in which the paper is loaded is correctly  
configured. See “Changing the Paper Source” on page 27.  
The Paper Output Tray is closed.  
Inner Cover is open.  
Press the Open Button to open the Paper Output Tray.  
Close Inner Cover then press [OK] on the machine.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
167  
Cause  
Action  
Unnecessary print jobs are queued./ Restart your computer. It may solve the problem.  
Computer problems  
Delete an undesired print job, if there is any. Use Canon IJ Status Monitor  
in Windows or Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center) in Macintosh for the  
deletion.  
1. Open the printer properties dialog box.  
2. Click the [Maintenance] tab and then [View Printer Status].  
3. Click [Display Print Queue].  
4. Select [Cancel All Documents] in the Printer menu.  
Note  
In Windows Me or Windows 98  
Select [Purge Print Documents] in the [Printer] menu.  
In Windows XP or Windows 2000  
[Cancel All Documents] may not be selected.  
5. When the confirmation message is displayed, click [Yes].  
The print job is deleted.  
1. Click the printer's icon in the Dock and display the list of print jobs in  
progress.  
When using Mac OS X v.10.2, click the printer icon in the Dock to start  
[Print Center] and then double-click the name of your machine under  
[Printer List] to display the list of print jobs.  
2. Click to select an undesired document and click  
The print job is deleted.  
.
The machine has been printing  
continuously over a long period.  
If so, the Print Head will overheat. To protect the Print Head, printing will  
stop temporarily and resume after a period of time. Interrupt printing when  
appropriate, turn OFF the machine, and wait at least 15 minutes.  
Caution  
The area around the Print Head may become extremely hot. Do not under  
any circumstances touch it.  
You are printing high-resolution If you are printing high-resolution documents, processing the data will  
documents such as photographs or take time, and printing will appear to have stopped depending on your  
illustrations.  
computer or environment. Wait until data is processed. If you are printing  
a document with a large printing area (with small margins) or are printing  
multiple sets, printing may stop to allow the ink time to dry.  
Incorrect page size is selected.  
Ensure that the page size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in  
the machine:  
z Check the Page Size setting from within your application to ensure that  
it matches the size of the paper loaded.  
z Check [Page Size] on the [Page Setup] tab in the printer properties  
dialog box of the printer driver (Windows) or the [Page Setup] dialog  
box of the printer driver (Macintosh) to ensure that it matches the size  
of the paper loaded.  
Troubleshooting  
168  
Chapter 11  
Cause  
Action  
Check the size of the print data. For Windows XP and Windows 2000, if the  
size of the data is too large, part of it may be lost. When the spool format is  
EMF, follow the procedure below.  
The size of the print data is too large.  
1. Open the printer properties dialog box.  
2. On the [Page Setup] tab, click [Print Options].  
3. Select the [Reduce spool data size] check box, and click [OK].  
Note  
When Reduce spool data size is set, the print quality may be degraded.  
This is useful when a part of straight lines or data is lost for page layout  
printing.  
Performing automatic duplex  
printing  
Select [Use reduced printing] in the printer driver. It may solve the  
problem.  
1. Open the printer properties dialog box.  
2. Click [Print Area Setup] in the [Page Setup] tab and select [Use reduced  
printing].  
1. In the [Print] dialog box, select [Duplex Printing & Margin] from the pop-  
up menu.  
2. Select [Automatic Duplex Printing], and select [Use reduced printing] in  
Print Area.  
When Copying  
Cause  
Action  
The document is not loaded  
correctly.  
Check that the document is loaded correctly on the Platen Glass or the  
ADF.  
See “Loading Documents” on page 20.  
The quality (print quality) displayed  
on the LCD is not suitable for the  
document.  
Set the image quality suitable for the document.  
See “Copying” on page 42.  
The document is not loaded with the When loading the document on the Platen Glass, the side to be copied  
should be face down.  
side to be copied face down.  
When loading in the ADF, the side to be copied should be face up.  
The document or photograph set on Image quality may be poor if you copy a printed document or photograph.  
the Platen Glass was printed from  
your machine.  
Instead, reprint the photograph directly from the digital camera, or the  
document from your computer.  
The Platen Glass or inner side of the Clean the Platen Glass, inner side of the Document Cover, or the ADF.  
Document Cover is dirty.  
See “Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover” on page 155.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
169  
Back of Paper is Smudged/Paper Does Not Feed  
Properly/Printed Surface is Scratched  
Cause  
Action  
Inside of the machine is dirty.  
If the inside of the machine is dirty, printed paper may be smudged.  
Follow the steps described below to clean the inside of the machine.  
1. Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine, then remove any paper from the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and Cassette. See “Turning on the Machine” on  
page 18.  
2. Place the only one sheet of A4/Letter-size plain paper in landscape,  
horizontally fold it in half.  
3. Unfold the paper, and load the paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder with the  
inverted-V edge down.  
4. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Bottom plate cleaning> from the  
<Maintenance> and press [OK].  
5. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes> on the Bottom plate cleaning  
confirmation screen and then press [OK].  
The paper that is loaded in the machine will feed through the machine  
and be ejected.  
If protrusions inside the machine are stained, wipe ink off the  
protrusions using a swab or the like.  
Important  
Before cleaning, be sure to turn off the machine.  
Troubleshooting  
170  
Chapter 11  
Cause  
Action  
Paper Feed Roller is dirty.  
Follow the steps described below to clean the Paper Feed Rollers.  
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers consumes them, so perform this  
procedure only when necessary.  
1. Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the machine, then remove any paper from the  
Auto Sheet Feeder and Cassette. See “Turning on the Machine” on  
page 18.  
2. Use [Feed Switch] to select the paper source to clean.  
3. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Roller cleaning> from the <Maintenance>  
and press [OK].  
4. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Yes> on the Roller cleaning confirmation  
screen and then press [OK].  
The Paper Feed Roller will rotate as it cleans.  
5. Repeat steps 3 and through 4 two times.  
6. Load three or more sheets of A4/Letter-sized plain paper lengthways in  
the paper source you selected in step 2.  
7. Repeat steps 3 and through 4 three times.  
The paper that is loaded in the machine will feed through the machine  
and be ejected.  
If there are no signs of improvement after performing three times, contact  
the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Inappropriate media type is used.  
z Check to see if the paper you are printing on is too thick or curled.  
See “Media types you cannot use” on page 24.  
z Note that smudging may occur at the top and bottom edges of the  
paper when using Borderless Printing. Ensure that the paper you are  
using is compatible with Borderless Printing. Refer to the Printer Driver  
Guide.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
171  
Cause  
Action  
Thick paper is used.  
If you set the machine to prevent paper abrasion, the clearance between  
the Print Head and the loaded paper is widened.  
If the printing surface is abraded even with the media type set correctly to  
match the loaded paper, set the machine to prevent paper abrasion.  
When copying or printing directly, see “If printing surface abrasion is not  
resolved even after taking the actions above:” on page 173.  
When printing from a computer, follow the procedure below.  
1. Open the printer properties dialog box.  
2. Click the [Maintenance] tab and then [Custom Settings].  
Important  
In Windows XP or Windows 2000  
When not logged on as a computer administrator or Administrators,  
you cannot open the [Custom Settings] dialog box.  
For further information on how to log on as an administrator, refer to  
your Windows documentation.  
3. Select the [Prevent paper abrasion] check box and click [Send].  
4. Click [OK] when the confirmation message appears.  
1. Open the [Canon IJ Printer Utility] dialog box.  
2. Select [Custom Settings] from the pop-up menu.  
3. Select [Prevent paper abrasion].  
Note  
Clear the [Prevent paper abrasion] check box once printing is complete.  
When [Prevent paper abrasion] is selected in the printer properties dialog  
box (Windows) or selected from [Custom Settings] in the Canon IJ Printer  
Utility dialog box (Macintosh), the setting is also applied under direct  
printing with the digital camera.  
Paper is curled.  
If all four corners or the printing surface of the paper is curled, the paper  
may become dirty or the paper may not feed properly. Use the paper after  
correcting paper curl as follows.  
1. Face up the printing surface (A), and cover it with a non-printing regular  
paper to avoid staining or scratching the surface.  
2. Roll up the paper in a direction opposite to paper curl as the figure  
below.  
(A)  
3. Check the printing paper if paper is corrected within approximately 2 to  
5 mm / 0.08 to 0.2 in (B).  
(A)  
(B)  
It is recommended to print the curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time.  
Troubleshooting  
172  
Chapter 11  
Cause  
Action  
Inner Cover is not closed  
completely.  
Close the Inner Cover completely. Paper does not feed properly if the  
Inner Cover is even slightly open.  
The media type is not selected  
correctly in the printer driver.  
On the [Main] tab of the printer driver, ensure that the [Media Type]  
selected matches the paper loaded. The print surface is smudged with  
some printing jobs despite being set correctly. Should this occur, on the  
[Maintenance] tab, click [Custom Settings] and place a check in [Prevent  
paper abrasion].  
In the [Print] dialog box of the printer driver, select [Quality & Media] from  
the pop-up menu, and then ensure that the [Media Type] selected matches  
the paper loaded. Additionally, the print surface may become smudged  
with some printing jobs despite being set correctly. Should this occur,  
click on [Custom Settings] from the Canon IJ Printer Utility pop-up menu  
and place a check in [Prevent paper abrasion].  
Paper is loaded incorrectly.  
Load in the portrait orientation regardless of the print direction of the Auto  
Sheet Feeder or Cassette.  
Ensure that paper is loaded correctly. Slide the Paper Guides against the  
paper stack.  
The paper stack exceeds the  
capacity of the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
The paper cannot be fed normally depending on its media type or your  
environment where the temperature and humidity are high or low. In that  
case, reduce the amount of paper to half (approx. 0.2" / 5 mm in height).  
Note  
If printing surface abrasion is not resolved even after taking the actions above:  
Follow the procedure below to specify <Prevent paper abrasion> to <ON>.  
The procedure below can also be used when printing directly from a digital camera.  
1. Display the Device settings screen. See “Display the Device settings screen.” on page 134.  
2. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Print settings>, then press [OK].  
3. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <Prevent paper abrasion>, then press [OK].  
4. Use [ ] or [ ] to select <ON>, then press [OK].  
*After finishing printing, use the same procedure to specify <Prevent paper abrasion> back to  
<OFF>.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
173  
Paper Curls/Ink Blots  
Cause  
Action  
Paper being used is too thin.  
Use Photo Paper Pro or other Canon specialty paper to print images that  
have a high color saturation. See “Media types you cannot use” on  
page 24.  
The media type is not selected  
correctly on the Operation Panel.  
Ensure that the media type selected on the Operation Panel matches that  
of the paper loaded.  
Paper Jams  
Cause  
Action  
Paper jams in the Paper Output Slot/ Remove the paper according to the following procedure.  
Auto Sheet Feeder.  
1. Slowly pull the paper out, either from the Auto Sheet Feeder or from the  
Paper Output Slot, whichever is easier.  
z If the paper tears and a piece remains inside the machine, open the  
Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) and remove it. Be careful not to touch the  
components inside the machine at this time.  
After removing all paper, close the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover), turn  
the machine off and turn it back on.  
z If you cannot pull the paper out, turn the machine off and turn it back  
on. The paper will be ejected automatically.  
2. Reload the paper into the machine and press [OK].  
z If you have turned off and on the machine in step 1, you will need to  
retry printing, because this operation cancels any print jobs in  
progress.  
If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if  
the paper jam error continues after removing the paper, contact the Canon  
Customer Care Center.  
Troubleshooting  
174  
Chapter 11  
Cause  
Action  
Paper jams inside the machine  
(Transport Unit).  
Remove the paper according to the following procedure.  
1. Open the Rear Cover.  
2. When you can see the jammed paper, slowly pull the paper out.  
Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine.  
If you cannot pull the paper out, turn the machine off and turn it back  
on. The paper will be ejected automatically.  
3. Close the Rear Cover.  
4. If you could not extract the paper in step 2, remove the Cassette.  
5. Slowly pull the jammed paper out.  
6. If any paper is sticking out of the Cassette, reload the paper in the  
Cassette.  
7. Insert the Cassette into the machine again, and press [OK] on the  
machine.  
If you have turned off and on the machine in step 2, you will need to  
retry printing, because this operation cancels any print jobs in  
progress.  
If you cannot remove the paper or if the paper tears inside the machine, or  
if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper, contact the  
Canon Customer Care Center.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
175  
Cause  
Action  
Paper jams inside the machine  
(Duplex Transport Section).  
Remove the paper according to the following procedure.  
1. Remove the Cassette.  
If the paper is loaded in the Auto Sheet Feeder, remove the paper from  
the Auto Sheet Feeder.  
2. Stand the machine with the left side down.  
Caution  
Always stand the machine with the left side down when standing the  
machine. Be careful that the right side is not down.  
3. Slowly pull the jammed paper out while pulling the green cover toward  
you.  
Caution  
Put back the machine immediately after removing the jammed paper.  
4. If any paper is sticking out of the Cassette, reload the paper in the  
Cassette.  
Reload paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder, if necessary.  
5. Insert the Cassette into the machine.  
6. Press [OK] on the machine.  
If you cannot remove the paper or if the paper tears inside the machine, or  
if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper, contact the  
Canon Customer Care Center.  
Landscape Credit Card-sized paper  
jams inside the machine.  
You cannot load Credit Card-sized paper in the landscape orientation.  
Remove the paper according to the following procedure.  
1. Load Credit Card-sized paper in the Auto Sheet Feeder one sheet at a  
time.  
Do not load it in the landscape orientation.  
2. Press [ON/OFF] on the machine to turn off the power.  
3. Press [ON/OFF] again on the machine to turn on the power.  
The paper is fed and the jammed paper is ejected accordingly.  
If you cannot remove the jammed paper or the error still persists, contact  
the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Landscape 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4  
mm media loaded in the Cassette  
jams inside the machine.  
Load 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4 mm media in the portrait orientation regardless  
of the print direction.  
Remove the paper according to the following procedure.  
1. Press [ON/OFF] of the machine to turn off the power.  
Open the Rear Cover.  
2. Fold a piece of plain A4- or Letter-sized paper in four, push it in until it  
hits the jammed paper, then pull out the paper folded in four.  
3. Close the Rear Cover, then press [ON/OFF] of the machine to turn on the  
power.  
Wait until the jammed paper is automatically ejected.  
If you cannot remove the jammed paper or the error still persists, contact  
the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Troubleshooting  
176  
Chapter 11  
Document Jams  
Cause  
Action  
Document jams in the ADF  
(Document Tray).  
Remove the document according to the following procedure.  
1. Press [Stop/Reset].  
2. If a multi-page document is loaded, remove any pages other than the  
jammed page from the ADF, then open the Feeder Cover.  
3. Raise the paper release lever (A) then remove the jammed page from  
under the roller to the Feeder Cover side.  
(A)  
4. Pull out the jammed document from the ADF.  
If the document cannot be pulled out with ease, follow the procedure from  
step 2 under “Document jams in the ADF (inner side).” on page 178.  
5. Lower the paper release lever (A) then close the Feeder Cover.  
z If documents remain in the ADF after pressing [Stop/Reset] during  
scanning, <Document in ADF.> appears on the LCD. Press [OK] so that  
the remaining document is automatically fed out.  
z When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from  
the first page.  
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the  
machine, or if the document jam error continues after removing the  
document, contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Note  
The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or  
your environment, such as when the temperature and humidity are either  
too high or too low.  
In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half  
of the loading capacity. See “Document Requirements” on page 19.  
If the document still jams, use the Platen Glass instead.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
177  
Cause  
Action  
Document jams in the ADF  
(inner side).  
Remove the document according to the following procedure.  
1. Follow steps 1 to 3 under “Document jams in the ADF (Document Tray).”  
on page 177.  
2. Open the Document Cover and pull out the document from the inner  
side.  
3. Close the Document Cover.  
4. Lower the paper release lever (A) then close the Feeder Cover.  
z When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from  
the first page.  
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the  
machine, or if the document jam error continues after removing the  
document, contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Document Jams in the ADF  
(Document Output Slot).  
If the document is jammed in the Document Output Slot, pull it out.  
z When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from  
the first page.  
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the  
machine, or if the document jam error continues after removing the  
document, contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet  
Cause  
Action  
<Failed to scan Photo Index Sheet.>  
is displayed.  
z Confirm the orientation and position of the Photo Index Sheet on the  
Platen Glass. See “Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet” on  
page 66.  
z Make sure that the Platen Glass or Photo Index Sheet is not dirty. See  
“Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet” on page 66.  
z Make sure all required circles on the Photo Index Sheet are filled in. If  
the filled circles on the sheet are not marked dark enough, the machine  
may not read the settings.  
Troubleshooting  
178  
Chapter 11  
Cannot Print Properly from the Digital Camera  
The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a digital still camera  
or digital video camcorder*, and the countermeasures to eliminate them.  
* Hereafter, the digital still camera and digital video camcorder are collectively called a digital camera  
or camera.  
Note  
z PictBridge or Canon Bubble Jet Direct compatible digital cameras can be connected to your  
machine for direct printing.  
z This section describes errors that are indicated on Canon-brand PictBridge- or Bubble Jet Direct  
compatible cameras. The error messages and operations may vary depending on the camera you  
are using. If you are using a non-Canon PictBridge compatible camera and not sure how to clear  
the printer error from the camera, confirm the message displayed on the LCD of the machine and  
clear the error. For clearing an error from the machine, see “An Error Message is Displayed on the  
LCD” on page 161.  
z A communication time out occurs if printing takes a long time or if it takes too much time to send  
data. This may stop printing. In such cases, disconnect the cable between the machine and the  
camera, and reconnect the cable between the machine and the camera. Then, turn the camera  
on, if it does not automatically turn on. If the problem is still unresolved, select some other photo  
and check if it can be printed or not.  
z Some PictBridge compatible devices may need to be switched to printing mode before connecting  
them to the machine. Also, it may need to be turned on manually or switched to replay mode after  
connected to the machine. Refer to the instruction manuals supplied with your PictBridge  
compatible device and take the necessary steps before connection.  
z The Print Head nozzles may be clogged if printing becomes faint or colors are incorrect. See  
“When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors are Incorrect” on page 148.  
z If the paper is curled or its surface is scratched during printing, make sure that you are using the  
correct type of paper. If this error occurs even when you are using the correct type of paper, see “If  
printing surface abrasion is not resolved even after taking the actions above:” on page 173.  
z For the errors indicated on the camera and their solution, also refer to the user’s manual of the  
camera. For other troubles with a digital camera, contact the manufacturer of the camera.  
Error Message On Camera  
Action  
Printer in use/Printer warming up  
Photos are printed from the computer.  
Wait until printing ends. When it is ready, the machine starts printing  
automatically.  
No paper/Media Type error/Paper  
Error  
z Load paper in either the Auto Sheet Feeder or Cassette which you have  
selected with [Feed Switch] on the machine, and select “Continue” in  
the display on your camera.  
*1  
z The camera does not support the page size that is selected on this  
machine. Check the print settings and select the page size that is  
supported by the camera.  
z Open the Paper Output Tray to resume printing. Close the Inner Cover if  
it is open. Select “Stop” in the display on your camera to stop printing.  
Paper jam  
Select “Stop” in the display on your camera to stop printing.  
Remove the jammed paper, load new paper, and press [OK] on the machine  
and retry printing.  
Printer cover open  
Close the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) on the machine.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
179  
Error Message On Camera  
Action  
No print head  
The Print Head is defective or not installed.  
Install a Print Head according to the Easy Setup Instructions.  
If the Print Head has already been installed, remove the Print Head and  
reinstall it.  
If the error still remains, the Print Head may be defective. Contact the  
Canon Customer Care Center.  
Waste tank (ink absorber) full  
This error message indicates that the waste ink absorber is nearly full.  
The machine has a built-in waste ink absorber to hold the ink used during  
Print Head cleaning, for example. You can continue printing by selecting  
*1  
“Continue” on the display on your camera.  
However, because printing is disabled once the waste ink absorber  
becomes completely full and until the waste ink absorber is replaced, you  
are recommended to contact the Canon Customer Care Center as early as  
possible. You will need to replace a particular part of the machine.  
Low ink level  
No Ink  
Slow flashing (about three seconds in red) of an ink tank lamp indicates  
that ink in this tank is low. Prepare a new ink tank.  
*1  
Select “Continue” in the display on your camera to resume printing.  
You can check the machine status according to the way the ink tank lamps  
(red) flash.  
Check the status of each lamp and take the appropriate action to clear the  
error. See “Getting the Ink Level Information” on page 142.  
When the ink tank lamp is off:  
z The ink tank may not be installed properly.  
Install the appropriate ink tank. See “Replacing an Ink Tank” on  
page 142.  
z The ink tank may not be compatible with this machine.  
Install the appropriate ink tank. See “Replacing an Ink Tank” on  
page 142.  
When the ink tank lamp flashes fast (about one second):  
z The ink has run out.  
Replace the ink tank, and close the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover).  
If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing, select  
*1  
“Continue” in the display on your camera with the ink tank installed.  
Then printing can continue under the ink out condition. Replace the  
empty ink tank immediately after the printing. The machine may be  
damaged if printing is continued under the ink out condition.  
Note  
If multiple ink tank lamps are flashing, check how fast they flash. Fast  
flashing (about one second) indicates the ink is empty. Slow flashing (about  
three seconds) indicates ink is low. For details on different flashing speeds,  
see “Knowing When to Replace Ink Tank” on page 143.  
z Some ink tanks are not installed in place, or more than one ink tanks of  
the same color are installed.  
Confirm that the ink tanks are installed in the appropriate positions. See  
“Replacing an Ink Tank” on page 142.  
Troubleshooting  
180  
Chapter 11  
Error Message On Camera  
Ink error/No ink  
Action  
The ink tank that was once empty is installed. Replace the ink tank.  
Printing under the situation may damage the Print Head. Canon shall not be  
liable for any machine malfunction or damage caused by refilled ink tanks.  
If you want to continue printing with the refilled ink tank installed, press and  
hold [Stop/Reset] for at least 5 seconds, and then release it.  
Using refilled ink tanks are memorized.  
* This operation will release the function for detecting the remaining ink  
level.  
Hardware Error/No ink  
Printer error  
Ink tank errors have occurred. Replace the ink tank.  
See “Replacing an Ink Tank” on page 142.  
An error requiring servicing might have occurred.  
Disconnect the cable between the machine and the camera, turn off the  
machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.  
After a while, plug the power cord of the machine back in, turn on the  
machine, and then reconnect the camera to the machine. If the same error  
occurs, contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
*1 To resume printing, you can press [OK] on the machine instead of selecting Continue.  
Cannot Install the MP Drivers  
Cause  
Action  
Reinstall the MP Drivers.  
Unable to proceed beyond the  
Printer Connection screen  
1. Click [Cancel] on the [Printer Connection] screen.  
2. Click [Start Over] on the [Installation Failure] screen.  
3. Click [Back] on the screen that appears next.  
4. Click [Exit] on the [Welcome] screen, then remove the CD-ROM.  
5. Turn the machine and the computer off.  
6. Check the cable connection.  
7. Restart the computer.  
8. Make sure that no other applications (including anti-virus software) are  
running in the background.  
9. Carefully follow the procedures described in the Easy Setup  
Instructions and reinstall the MP Drivers.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
181  
Cause  
Action  
Installation does not start  
automatically when the Setup CD-  
ROM is inserted into the drive.  
Click [Start], select [My Computer] and then double-click the CD-ROM  
icon.  
For non-Windows XP users, open the [My Computer] window and then  
double-click the CD-ROM icon.  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon on your desktop to start installation.  
If the CD-ROM icon is not displayed on the desktop, there is a problem  
with the CD-ROM.  
Contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
You have a defective Setup CD-ROM. If you have a defective Setup CD-ROM, please contact the Canon  
Customer Care Center.  
Select [My Computer] from the [Start] menu and check if the CD-ROM icon  
is displayed.  
Reconfirm that the CD-ROM icon is displayed when you insert the CD-  
ROM.  
Uninstall the old version of the software following the instructions in the  
manual of that version, and reinstall the new version.  
The computer has an old version of  
the software installed. (Canon  
MultiPASS is registered as a  
program in the [Start] menu.)  
Installation procedure not followed  
correctly  
Follow the Easy Setup Instructions packaged with your machine for  
proper MP Drivers installation.  
If the MP Drivers was not installed correctly, uninstall the MP Drivers, and  
restart your computer. Try to reinstall the MP Drivers.  
If the installer was forced to be terminated due to an error, restart your  
computer.  
Reinstall the MP Drivers.  
Troubleshooting  
182  
Chapter 11  
Cannot Connect to the Computer Properly  
Printing Speed is Slow / USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Connection Does Not Work  
Cause  
Action  
Your environment is not fully  
compatible with USB 2.0 Hi-Speed.  
If your environment is not fully compatible with USB 2.0 Hi-Speed, the  
printer will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1.1. In this case,  
the machine operates properly but printing speed may slow down due to  
communication speed.  
Check the following to ensure that your computer environment supports  
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed connection.  
z The USB port on your computer supports USB 2.0 Hi-Speed  
connection.  
z Both the USB cable and USB hub support USB 2.0 Hi-Speed  
connection.  
Be sure to use a certified USB 2.0 Hi-Speed cable. You are  
recommended to use the cable no longer than 9.8 feet (3 meters).  
z Your computer supports the USB 2.0 Hi-Speed connection.  
Obtain the latest version of the USB 2.0 Hi-Speed driver and install it on  
your computer.  
z The USB 2.0 Hi-Speed driver operates properly.  
Obtain the latest version of the USB 2.0 Hi-Speed driver and install it on  
your computer.  
Important  
For how to confirm the points above, contact the manufacturer of your  
computer, USB cable, or USB hub, as appropriate.  
When You Connect to a Computer Running Windows XP, the Screen  
Shows the Warning Message “This device can perform faster” or “High-  
SPEED USB Device Plugged into non-High-SPEED USB Hub”  
Cause  
Action  
You connect to a computer that does Your environment is not fully compatible with USB 2.0.  
not support USB 2.0 Hi-Speed.  
See “Printing Speed is Slow / USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Connection Does Not  
Work” on page 183.  
Problems Receiving Faxes  
Cannot Receive a Fax  
Cause  
Action  
The machine is not on.  
z You cannot receive faxes if the power is turned off. Press [ON/OFF] to  
turn the power on.  
z After a power failure or disconnecting of the power cord, press [ON/  
OFF] to turn the power on.  
The machine's memory is full.  
Either print or delete documents in memory (see “Printing a List of  
Documents in Memory” on page 113) to free up memory. Then ask the  
sender to resend the fax.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
183  
Cause  
Action  
There was an error during reception.  
z Check the LCD for an error message. See “An Error Message is  
Displayed on the LCD” on page 161.  
z Print the Activity report and check for an error. See “Printing the  
Activity Report Manually” on page 105.  
The telephone line is not correctly  
connected.  
Check that the telephone line is connected correctly to Telephone Line  
Jack and that the telephone (or another external device such as an  
answering machine or a computer modem) is connected correctly to  
External Device Jack. Refer to the Easy Setup Instructions.  
The machine is not set to the  
appropriate receive mode.  
Check the receive mode setting (A), and change it to a mode suited to the  
your connection if necessary.  
(A)  
– <FAX only>  
See “If You Want to Receive Only Faxes Automatically with Your Machine,  
or Have a Dedicated Telephone Line for Fax Use Only:” on page 119.  
– <Manual RX>  
See “If You Receive Mainly Voice Calls and Sometimes Faxes, or Want to  
Receive Faxes Manually:” on page 120.  
– <Ans mc. connect>  
See “If You Want to Receive Voice Messages on Your Answering Machine  
and Receive Faxes Automatically:” on page 120.  
– <F/T auto switch>  
See “If You Want to Receive Faxes Automatically as well as Voice Calls:”  
on page 120.  
– <DRPD>  
See “If You Have Subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) Service with Your Telephone Company (US and Canada only):” on  
page 121.  
– <Network switch>  
See “If You Want Your Machine to Automatically Switch between Fax and  
Voice Calls by the Call Ring Patterns (Network Switch):” on page 121.  
Cannot Print a Fax  
Cause  
Action  
The machine's memory is full.  
Either print or delete documents in memory (see “Printing a List of  
Documents in Memory” on page 113) to free up memory. Then ask the  
sender to resend the fax.  
*1  
A paper size other than A4, LTR or  
*1  
If a paper size other than A4, LTR or LGL is loaded in the configured  
paper source, incoming faxes are not printed and are stored in memory.  
LGL is loaded.  
*1  
Change the paper in the configured paper source to A4, LTR or LGL size,  
*1  
then press [OK] on the machine. Load legal-sized paper in the Auto  
Sheet Feeder.  
Paper is not loaded.  
If there is no paper loaded in the configured paper source, the received fax  
is stored in memory and not printed. Load some paper and press [OK] on  
the machine.  
Troubleshooting  
184  
Chapter 11  
Cause  
Action  
Ink is running low or ink has run out. Received faxes are stored in memory and not printed if the ink is running  
low or has run out. Replace the ink tank (see “Replacing an Ink Tank” on  
page 142) and print the fax from memory. (See “Printing or Deleting a  
Document in Memory” on page 114.)  
Note  
Faxes received in the fax mode start printing automatically after the ink  
tank is replaced.  
*1 LGL may not be available depending on the country of purchase.  
Cannot Receive Faxes Automatically  
Cause  
Action  
The receive mode displayed on the  
bottom left of the LCD is not <FAX  
only>, <Ans. machine connect.>,  
If the receive mode is <Manual RX>, you cannot receive faxes unless you  
pick up the handset and either press [Color] or [Black], or dial the remote  
receiving ID.  
*1  
<FAX/TEL auto switch>, <DRPD>  
or <Network switch>.  
,
If you want to receive faxes automatically, which means not having to do  
anything when you are sent a fax, set the receive mode to <FAX only>,  
*1  
<Ans. machine connect.>, <FAX/TEL auto switch>, <DRPD> , or  
<Network switch>. See “Receive Modes” on page 119.  
If the receive mode is <Ans. machine connect.>, connect an answering  
machine to the machine and check that a message plays back when the  
answering machine answers.  
*1 This setting is only available in US and Canada.  
Machine Does Not Switch Automatically between Voice and Fax Calls  
Cause  
Action  
The receive mode displayed on the  
bottom left of the LCD is not <Ans.  
machine connect.>, <FAX/TEL auto  
switch>, <DRPD> , or <Network  
switch>.  
There will be no automatic switching between voice and fax calls unless  
the receive mode is set to <Ans. machine connect.>, <FAX/TEL auto  
switch>, <DRPD> , or <Network switch>.  
*1  
*1  
If the receive mode is <Ans. machine connect.>, connect an answering  
machine to the machine and check that a message plays back when the  
answering machine answers.  
*1 This setting is only available in US and Canada.  
Quality of Received Fax is Poor  
Cause  
Action  
<ECM RX> is set to <OFF>.  
Set <ECM RX> to <ON>. See “ECM RX” on page 139.  
The sender's original document or  
fax machine is dirty.  
The image quality of the fax is mainly determined by the sender's fax  
machine. Contact the sender and check whether the scanning area of his/  
her fax machine is not dirty.  
ECM sending/receiving is not  
enabled although the line/  
connection is poor.  
z On your machine, set <ECM RX> to <ON>. (See “ECM RX” on page 139.)  
z Contact the sender and check that his/her machine is set to enable  
ECM sending.  
z If the sender's or receiver’s fax is not ECM-compatible, the fax will be  
sent/received in the standard mode  
z Reduce the reception start speed. See “RX start speed” on page 140.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
185  
Repeated Errors Occur When You Receive a Fax  
Cause  
Action  
The telephone line condition or the  
connection is poor.  
Reduce the reception start speed. See “RX start speed” on page 140.  
If there is a poor line or connection, reducing the reception start speed  
may correct the error.  
The sender's fax machine is not  
operating normally.  
Contact the sender and check whether his/her fax machine is operating  
normally.  
Problems Sending Faxes  
Cannot Send a Fax  
Cause  
Action  
The machine is not on.  
z You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press [ON/OFF] to turn  
the power on.  
z After a power failure or disconnecting of the power cord, press [ON/  
OFF] to turn the power on.  
The In Use/Memory Lamp is  
flashing.  
Another document is being sent from memory. Wait until the machine  
finishes sending it.  
The telephone line is connected to  
the External Device Jack.  
Reconnect to the Telephone Line Jack. Refer to the Easy Setup  
Instructions.  
If you still cannot send a fax, there is a problem with the telephone line.  
Contact your telephone company and the manufacturer of your terminal  
adapter or telephone adapter.  
The telephone line type is not set  
correctly.  
If the telephone line type is not set correctly, you will not be able to send  
faxes, but will still be able to receive them. In this case, check the  
telephone line type setting and change it as necessary. See “Setting the  
Telephone Line Type” on page 81.  
<Dial tone detect> is set to <ON>.  
Resend the fax after a while. If you still cannot send the fax, set <Dial tone  
detect> to <OFF>.  
The fax number is not correctly  
registered in a speed dial.  
Make sure that the fax number is correctly registered when speed dialing.  
See “Registering One-Touch Speed Dialing” on page 86.  
There was an error during  
transmission.  
z Check the LCD for an error message. See “An Error Message is  
Displayed on the LCD” on page 161.  
z Print the Activity report and check for an error. See “Printing the  
Activity Report Manually” on page 105.  
Cannot hear the dial tone.  
Check that the telephone line is connected correctly to the proper jack. If  
so, then there is a problem with your telephone line. Contact your  
telephone line provider.  
The document is not loaded  
properly.  
Remove the document then reload it on the Platen Glass or ADF. See  
“Loading Documents to Copy, Fax, or Scan” on page 19.  
A fax destination is displayed on the Another document is being sent from memory. Wait until the machine  
LCD.  
finishes sending it.  
There was a printer error.  
Resolve the printer error. If you are out of paper, set the paper.  
If you are in a hurry, you can send the fax before resolving the printer error  
by pressing [Stop/Reset]. In this case, be sure to press [FAX] to print the  
faxes stored in memory once the transmission is complete.  
Troubleshooting  
186  
Chapter 11  
Cannot Send a Fax Clearly  
Cause  
Action  
The document is not loaded  
z Remove the document, then reload it on the Platen Glass or in the ADF.  
See “Loading Documents to Copy, Fax, or Scan” on page 19.  
correctly, or the Platen Glass or the  
inner side of the Document Cover is  
dirty.  
z Clean the Platen Glass or the ADF and reload the document. See  
“Cleaning Your Machine” on page 154.  
The image quality setting or the  
On the LCD, set an image quality suitable and a scan contrast suitable for  
scan contrast setting is not suitable the document. See “Before Sending Faxes” on page 106.  
for the document.  
The document is not loaded with the When loading the document on the Platen Glass, the side to be scanned  
side to be scanned face down.  
should be face down. When loading in the ADF, the side to be scanned  
should be face up.  
You are scanning thick (max. 3/4 in./ Press on the Document Cover with your hand when scanning.  
20 mm) or curled documents.  
Repeated Errors Occur When You Send a Fax  
Cause  
Action  
The telephone line condition or the  
connection is poor.  
Reduce the transmission start speed. See “TX start speed” on page 139.  
If there is a poor line or connection, reducing the transmission start speed  
may correct the error.  
Telephone Problems  
Cannot Dial  
Cause  
Action  
The telephone line is not correctly  
connected.  
Check that the telephone line is connected correctly. Refer to the Easy  
Setup Instructions.  
The telephone line type is not set  
correctly.  
Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary. See  
“Setting the Telephone Line Type” on page 81.  
Telephone Disconnects During a Call  
Cause  
Action  
The power cord, the telephone line, Check that the power cord, the telephone line, and the telephone (or  
or the telephone (or another external another external device such as an answering machine or a computer  
device such as an answering  
machine or a computer modem) is  
not connected securely.  
modem) are connected securely.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
187  
Problems Scanning  
Scanner won’t work  
Cause  
Action  
The machine is not recognized by  
the computer.  
Restart the computer.  
This may enable the computer to recognize the machine.  
ScanGear MP won’t start  
Cause  
Action  
Scanner driver (ScanGear MP) not  
installed.  
Set the Setup CD-ROM and install the software.  
Scanner is not selected in the  
application software.  
In the application software, select this machine in [Select Source] or  
[Import] under the [File] menu.  
Note  
If you are using an older application software, the menu item may be  
named [Select TWAIN-compliant device] instead of [Select Source].  
The feature of the application  
software does not support TWAIN.  
Start ScanGear MP from within a TWAIN compatible software.  
An error message appears and the  
ScanGear MP window fails to  
appear.  
z Reattaching the USB cable. Be sure to use a certified USB 2.0 Hi-Speed  
cable. You are recommended to use the cable no longer than 9.8 feet (3  
meters).  
z If a USB hub is used for the connection, do not use it. Attach the cable  
to a USB port on the computer itself (not the hub).  
z Attach the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer itself (not  
a hub).  
z Set the Setup CD-ROM and install the software.  
z Select this machine in [Select Source] or [Import] in your application  
software.  
z Make sure that your application software supports TWAIN. You cannot  
start ScanGear MP from within an application software that does not  
support TWAIN.  
Cannot display preview  
Cause  
Action  
An error message “Release the lock Close the application softwares, disconnect the USB interface cable from  
switch” appears and the machine  
fails to preview.  
the scanner and set the Scanner Lock Switch to the release position. Then  
reconnect the USB interface cable to the computer. For details on  
releasing the Scanner lock, refer to the Easy Setup Instructions.  
Computer stops operating during scanning  
Cause  
Action  
Output resolution set too high.  
Reboot the computer, lower the output resolution and rescan.  
The hard disk does not have enough  
available space.  
z Reset and reboot the computer, delete unnecessary files and  
application software, and rescan.  
z Open ScanGear MP from within the application software, click the  
[Preferences] button in the Advanced Mode, and change the folder  
listed in the [Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved] category  
to one on a disk with sufficient free space.  
Troubleshooting  
188  
Chapter 11  
Cause  
Action  
Multiple devices connected to the  
USB port.  
Disconnect all other devices but the machine from the port.  
Scan quality is poor (Poor image displayed on the monitor)  
Cause  
Action  
The resolution is low.  
If the image looks grainy, increase the scan resolution.  
For details, refer to the Scan Guide.  
Specification of the application  
software.  
Some application software does not display the image clearly if the image  
is too small. Set the view mode to 100%.  
Moiré appears.  
Set [Descreen] to [ON] in the [Image Settings] section of the Advanced  
Mode of ScanGear MP.  
Note  
Moiré may appear when you scan digital photo prints.  
Inappropriate display settings.  
Set your display settings on your computer to Medium (16 bit) or higher.  
In the [Start] menu click [Control Panel], then [Appearance and Themes]  
and then [Display], and on the [Settings] sheet, set [Color quality] to  
[Medium (16 bit)] or [Highest (32 bit)] or a higher setting.  
In the System Preferences dialog, click the [Displays] icon and select the  
[Display] tab. Set the [Colors] list box to [Thousands] or a higher setting.  
Dirty Platen Glass or inner side of  
the Document Cover.  
See “Cleaning Your Machine” on page 154 to clean them.  
The status of the original is poor.  
Scan with certain functions such as [Reduce Dust and Scratches], [Fading  
Correction] or [Grain Correction] in the [Image Settings] section of the  
Advanced Mode of ScanGear MP.  
Note  
If a print out of an image does not appear satisfactory or the same as what  
you see on the monitor, you may need to change the machine’s settings,  
or the machine itself may have engaged in problems.  
Parts of image missing or surrounded by extra white areas  
Cause Action  
Scan area was specified larger than Specify the scan area appropriately.  
the original.  
If you click the Auto crop button of the ScanGear MP, the scan area is  
adjusted automatically to match the size of the original. When scanning an  
original surrounded by white borders such as a photo print, of if you  
otherwise want to specify a custom scan area, specify the scan area  
manually. Refer to the Scan Guide for details on manual scan area  
specification.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
189  
Trouble scanning with Multi-Scan or Multi-Crop function  
Cause  
Action  
The original is positioned outside  
the supported area.  
Check the position of the original on the Platen Glass. Observe the  
following when using the Multi-Scan or Multi-crop function.  
z There should be a gap of at least 0.4" / 10 mm between the edge of the  
Platen Glass and originals.  
z Leave at least 0.4" / 10 mm between the originals.  
z A maximum of 10 originals can be scanned at once.  
z If an original is slightly crooked on the Platen Glass-within 10 degrees  
of true-the image is automatically straightened.  
z The Multi-Scan function only works with rectangular originals such as  
photos.  
z Originals that are not rectangular (irregularly shaped, close-cropped  
photos) cannot be detected correctly.  
z Originals must be at least as large as approx. 1"/25 mm square.  
Error arising from application  
software specifications.  
Some application software do not support multiple image scanning. Scan  
each item individually without using the Multi-Scan or Multi-Crop function.  
Slow scanning speed  
Cause  
Action  
Resolution is set higher than  
necessary.  
To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to 75 dpi. To  
print, set the output resolution to a value such as 300 dpi.  
Image correction features such as  
dust and scratch reduction, fading  
correction, and descreening are  
enabled in ScanGear MP.  
Set [Reduce Dust and Scratches], [Fading Correction], and [Descreen] to  
[OFF] in the [Image Settings] section of the Advanced Mode of ScanGear  
MP.  
“There is not enough memory.” message is displayed  
Cause  
Action  
There is not enough memory to  
continue scanning.  
Exit any application software that are running, and try to run this software  
again.  
Troubleshooting  
190  
Chapter 11  
Scanned image not displayed properly  
Cause  
Action  
Scanned image prints out enlarged  
(reduced).  
Set the printing size in the application software.  
Scanned image enlarged (reduced)  
on the computer monitor.  
z Change the display setting in the application software.  
z Images opened in [Paint] or [Imaging] may be displayed in full size and  
you may not be able to reduce its display size. Open the image in an  
application software supplied with the scanner instead. Refer to the on-  
screen manual for each application software for the detailed  
procedures.  
z Change the resolution setting in the scanner driver and rescan. The  
higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be.  
z Some application software do not display clear images at small image  
display settings. Set the scale to 100%.  
Scanned image won’t open.  
The file name extension is not supported by the application software.  
Rescan the image using an application software, and change the file name  
extension when saving the image. Refer to the on-screen manual for each  
application software for the detailed procedures.  
Trouble scanning with MP Navigator  
Cause  
Action  
The original may not be scanned  
correctly when [Document Size] is  
set to [Auto Detect].  
Set the [Document Size] to the actual size of the original, and scan it  
again. If the size you need cannot be set, scan to a larger size and trim it.  
For more information, refer to the Scan Guide.  
Image position and size incorrect when scanning from the machine's  
operation panel  
Cause  
Action  
MP Navigator settings do not match Set the MP Navigator [Document Type] and [Document Size] to match  
the originals  
those of the originals being scanned. For more information, refer to the  
Scan Guide.  
Scanned image is slanted although document is set properly  
Cause Action  
When the [Correct the inclination of Clear the [Correct the inclination of text documents] check box in MP  
text documents] check box is  
selected, scanning may not be  
performed properly depending on  
the document.  
Navigator, then rescan the document. For more information, refer to  
"[Scan Settings] Dialog Box" under "Using MP Navigator" in the Scan  
Guide.  
Scanned image is rotated although document is set properly  
Cause  
Action  
When the [Detect the orientation of Clear the [Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images]  
text documents and rotate images] check box in MP Navigator, then rescan the document. For more  
check box is selected, scanning may information, refer to "[Scan Settings] Dialog Box" under "Using MP  
not be performed properly  
depending on the document.  
Navigator" in the Scan Guide.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
191  
An Error Message Appears on the Screen  
Service Error 5100 is Displayed  
Cause  
Action  
Movement of the Print Head Holder  
is blocked.  
Clear the paper jam or foreign object that is preventing the Print Head  
Holder from moving, cancel printing from your computer, then turn off the  
machine and turn it back on again.  
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error  
Cause  
Action  
Machine is not ready.  
Ensure that the lamp on the Operation Panel lights.  
If the lamp on the Operation Panel is off, turn the machine on.  
While [COPY] is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until [COPY]  
stops flashing and stays lit. When the Alarm Lamp lights orange, an error  
may occur in the machine. For details on how to resolve the error, see “An  
Error Message is Displayed on the LCD” on page 161.  
Paper is not loaded.  
Load paper and press [OK].  
If paper is loaded, ensure that the paper source (the Auto Sheet Feeder or  
Cassette) is selected correctly. If the paper source is not selected  
correctly, use [Feed Switch] or the printer driver to change the paper  
source.  
If this error (Paper is not loaded) is ignored for a certain period of time, an  
additional message may be displayed.  
Printer port setting does not match  
the interface connected to the  
machine.  
Check the printer port settings.  
1. Click [Start] and select [Control Panel], [Printers and Other Hardware],  
and then [Printers and Faxes].  
For non-Windows XP, click [Start], select [Settings], and then [Printers].  
2. Select the icon of your machine.  
3. Open the [File] menu and select [Properties].  
4. Click the [Ports] tab (or the [Details] tab) to confirm the port settings.  
A USB port is selected if either [USBnnn (Canon MP830 Series Printer)]  
or [MPUSBPRNnn (Canon MP830 Printer)] (where n is a number) is  
indicated.  
If the port setting is not correct, change the port setting according to  
the interface you are using on the [Ports] tab (or the [Details] tab), or  
reinstall the MP Drivers.  
Machine is not properly connected.  
Ensure that the printer cable is securely connected to the computer.  
z If using a switching hub or other device, disconnect the machine and  
reconnect it directly to the computer and try printing again. If  
successful, the problem may have been with the device.  
z There could also be a problem with the cable(s). Replace the cable(s)  
and try printing again.  
Troubleshooting  
192  
Chapter 11  
Cause  
Action  
MP Drivers is not installed properly. Uninstall then reinstall the MP Drivers.  
1. Click [Start], and select [All Programs] (or [Programs]), the name of your  
machine, and [Uninstall].  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the driver.  
3. Follow the procedures described in the Easy Setup Instructions and  
reinstall the MP Drivers.  
When an Error is Displayed Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing  
Cause  
Action  
The correct media size is not  
selected in the printer driver.  
Check the Page Size setting from within your application software to  
ensure that it matches the size of the paper loaded.  
Check [Page Size] on the [Page Setup] tab in the printer properties dialog  
box (Windows) or the [Page Setup] dialog box (Macintosh) to ensure that it  
matches the size of the paper loaded.  
The page sizes that can be used for Automatic Duplex Printing are Letter,  
A4, B5, A5, and 5" x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8 mm. Check that the page size of the  
loaded paper is correct.  
Note  
To print on both sides of the page manually, follow the procedure below.  
On the [Page Setup] tab, clear the [Automatic] check box. Then try printing  
again.  
The manual duplex printing function cannot be used.  
Error No.: 300 is Displayed  
Cause  
Action  
The machine is not ready.  
Ensure that the lamp on the Operation Panel lights.  
If the lamp on the Operation Panel is off, turn the machine on.  
While [COPY] is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until [COPY]  
stops flashing and stays lit.  
When the Alarm Lamp lights orange, an error may occur in the machine.  
For details on how to resolve the error, see “An Error Message is  
Displayed on the LCD” on page 161.  
Machine is not properly connected.  
Ensure that the printer cable is securely connected to the computer.  
z If using a switching hub or other device, disconnect the machine and  
reconnect it directly to the computer and try printing again. If  
successful, the problem may have been with the device.  
z There could also be a problem with the cable(s). Replace the cable(s)  
and try printing again.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
193  
Cause  
Action  
The name of the machine being used Select [MP830] from the [Printer] pop-up menu in the [Print] dialog box of  
is not selected in the [Printer] pull-  
down menu of the [Print] dialog box.  
the printer driver.  
If [MP830] is not displayed in the printer list, follow the procedure below to  
confirm the settings.  
1. Select [Print & Fax Preferences] from the [Printer] pop-up menu.  
2. Check that [MP830] is displayed in the screen that is displayed and  
select the [In Menu] check box.  
When you are using Mac OS X v.10.3.x or Mac OS X v.10.2.x, select [Edit  
Printer List] from the [Printer] pop-up menu and ensure that [MP830] is  
displayed in the [Printer List] and select the check box.  
3. If [MP830] is not displayed, click [+] to add a printer.  
If [MP830] is not displayed, install the MP Drivers again referring to the  
Easy Setup Instructions for the operation.  
Error No.: 1700 is Displayed  
Cause  
Action  
The waste ink absorber is almost  
full.  
Ink used for cleaning is absorbed in a waste ink absorber placed in the  
machine.  
Press [OK] to cancel the error so that you can continue printing. Once the  
waste ink absorber becomes completely full, printing cannot be done until  
the waste ink absorber is replaced.  
Canon recommends to contact the Canon Customer Care Center as soon  
as possible.  
Error No.: 1851 is Displayed  
Cause  
Action  
Inner Cover is open when starting  
regular printing.  
Close Inner Cover, then press [OK] on the machine.  
Error No.: 1856 is Displayed  
Cause  
Action  
During regular printing, Inner Cover Close Inner Cover, press [OK] on the machine, then try printing again.  
is opened.  
One page of the print data being sent at the time of the error will be  
erased, so print that page again.  
Troubleshooting  
194  
Chapter 11  
Error No.: 2001 is Displayed  
Cause  
Action  
A specified period of time has  
elapsed without receiving a  
response from the digital camera./  
The digital camera or digital video  
camcorder connected is not  
compatible with this machine.  
Disconnect the camera cable and reconnect it.  
Depending on the model or brand of your device, you may have to select a  
print mode compliant with PictBridge before connecting the device.  
You may also have to turn on the device or select Play mode manually  
after connecting the device to the machine. Unplug the connecting cable  
and clear the error. Perform necessary operations for connection referring  
to the instruction manual supplied with the PictBridge compliant device,  
and then connect the cable again.  
If the error is still unresolved, there is a possibility that you are using a  
digital camera or digital video camcorder that is not supported by this  
machine. Use a digital camera or digital video camcorder compatible with  
this machine.  
Error No.: 2500 is Displayed  
Cause  
Action  
Auto head align has failed.  
See “Auto head align has failed.” on page 163.  
For Windows Users  
Cause  
Action  
The [Instructions] button is not  
displayed on the printer driver  
screen.  
The [Instructions] on the printer driver screen is not displayed if the on-  
screen manuals (instruction manuals) are not installed. Set the “Setup CD-  
ROM” in your computer and install the on-screen manuals (instruction  
manuals).  
Note  
The [Instructions] is displayed only on [Main] and [Maintenance] tabs.  
Scan Guide is not displayed.  
The  
button for displaying the scanner driver operating instruction is  
grayed out when the on-screen manuals (instruction manuals) are not  
installed. Set the “Setup CD-ROM” in your computer and install the on-  
screen manuals (instruction manuals).  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 11  
195  
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem  
If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter, please contact the  
Canon Customer Care Center.  
Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers.  
Caution  
Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the machine will invalidate any warranty regardless of  
whether the warranty has expired.  
Before contacting the Canon Customer Care Center, confirm the following:  
z Product name: PIXMA MP830  
z Serial number: written on label inside machine  
z Details of the problem  
z What you tried to solve the problem, and what happened  
Note  
If the machine emits any unusual sound, smoke, or odor, turn it off immediately. Unplug the power  
cord from the outlet and contact the Canon Customer Care Center. Never attempt to repair or  
disassemble the machine yourself.  
Troubleshooting  
196  
Chapter 11  
Chapter 12  
Appendix  
Printing Area  
To ensure the best print quality, the machine allows a margin along each edge of media. The actual  
printable area will be the area without these margins. By selecting Borderless Printing*, printing with  
no margins is possible.  
* This is available in A4, Letter, 4" x 6" /101.6 x 152.4 mm, 4" x 8" /101.6 x 203.2 mm, 5" x 7" / 127.0  
x 177.8 mm, and 2.13" x 3.39" / 54.0 x 86.0 mm sizes of paper. If you are making borderless copies  
in Copy mode, you can adjust the amount of image that extends off the paper by setting <Extended  
copy amount> under <Print settings>.  
Note  
z In duplex printing, the printable area at the top of the page is 2 mm / 0.08 inches narrower than  
the usual area.  
z If you print fully on the printable area outside of the recommended printing area, print quality or  
paper feeding accuracy may go down.  
A5, A4, B5, 4" x 6", 4" x 8", 5" x 7", 2.13" x 3.39"  
Size  
Printable Area (width x height)  
141.2 x 202.0 mm / 5.6 x 7.9 inches  
A5  
A4  
203.2 x 289.0 mm / 8.0 x 11.4 inches  
175.2 x 249.0 mm / 6.9 x 9.8 inches  
120.2 x 169.8 mm / 4.7 x 6.7 inches  
94.8 x 144.4 mm / 3.7 x 5.7 inches  
94.8 x 195.2 mm / 3.7 x 7.8 inches  
47.2 x 78.0 mm / 1.86 x 3.07 inches  
B5  
5" x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8 mm  
4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4 mm  
4" x 8" / 101.6 x 203.2 mm  
2.13" x 3.39" / 54.0 x 86.0 mm  
Note  
When Printing on Photo Paper Pro PR-101, Glossy Photo Paper GP-401, Glossy Photo  
Paper “Everyday Use” GP-501, Photo Paper Plus Glossy PP-101, Photo Paper Plus Double  
Sided PP-101D, Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-101 and Matte Photo Paper MP-101,  
selection of “Borderless Printing” enables you to make prints with no margins.  
However, Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality on the top and bottom edges of the  
paper or cause it to become smudged.  
3.0 mm/0.12 in  
39.5 mm/1.58 in  
36.5 mm/1.46 in  
3.4 mm/0.13 in  
5.0 mm/0.2 in  
3.4 mm/0.13 in  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
197  
Printable area  
Recommended printing area  
Letter, Legal  
Size  
Printable Area (width x height)  
203.2 x 271.4 mm / 8.0 x 10.7 inches  
Letter  
Legal  
203.2 x 347.6 mm / 8.0 x 13.7 inches  
Note  
When Printing on Photo Paper Pro PR-101, Glossy Photo Paper GP-401, Glossy Photo  
Paper “Everyday Use” GP-501, Photo Paper Plus Glossy PP-101, Photo Paper Plus Double  
Sided PP-101D, Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-101 and Matte Photo Paper MP-101,  
selection of “Borderless Printing” enables you to make prints with no margins.  
However, Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality on the top and bottom edges of the  
paper or cause it to become smudged.  
3.0 mm/0.12 in  
39.5 mm/1.58 in  
36.5 mm/1.46 in  
5.0 mm/0.2 in  
6.4 mm/0.25 in 6.3 mm/0.24 in  
Printable area  
Recommended printing area  
Envelopes  
Size  
Printable Area (width x height)  
190.5 x 103.2 mm / 7.5 x 4.1 inches  
European DL  
US Com. #10  
211.8 x 98.0 mm / 8.3 x 3.9 inches  
3.0 mm/0.12 in  
26.5 mm/1.04 in  
3.4 mm/0.13 in  
3.4 mm/0.13 in  
Recommended printing area  
Appendix  
198  
Chapter 12  
How to Read the On-screen Manuals  
The on-screen manuals are manuals to be viewed on your computer.  
Read these manuals for detailed information on usage of the machine that is not mentioned in this  
document, troubleshooting, or usage of the application softwares supplied with the Setup CD-ROM,  
etc.  
If you have not installed or have deleted the on-screen manuals, you can install them using the  
Setup CD-ROM by either of the following.  
z Select “Easy Install” to install the on-screen manuals along with the MP driver and application  
softwares.  
z Select “On-screen Manual” from “Custom Install” to install the on-screen manuals.  
Browser: Windows® HTML Help Viewer  
Note  
z Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0® or later must be installed.  
z The on-screen manual may not be displayed properly depending on your operating system or  
Internet Explorer version. We recommend that you keep your system up to date with Windows  
Update.  
Browser: Help Viewer  
Note  
z The on-screen manual may not be displayed properly depending on your operating system. We  
recommend that you keep your system up to date.  
z We recommend using Safari as your Web browser to view the HTML format On-screen Manuals.  
If Safari is not installed on your computer, download it from Apple Computer, Inc. website and  
install it.  
Uninstalling the On-screen Manuals  
Follow the steps described below to uninstall all of the installed on-screen manuals from your  
computer.  
If the on-screen manuals have been installed, all of them will be deleted collectively.  
1
2
Click [Start], and select [All Programs] (or [Programs]), [Canon MP830 Manual],  
and then [Uninstall].  
Click [OK] when the confirmation message appears.  
When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed, click [OK] to restart  
your computer.  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
199  
z Deleting the Printer Driver Guide  
The Printer Driver Guide is deleted when the printer driver is deleted.  
z Deleting the User’s Guide and the Photo Application Guide  
(1) Select [Applications] from the [Go] menu.  
(2) Double-click the [Canon Utilities] folder, and then the [IJ Manual] folder.  
(3) Drag the [MP830] folder into the trash.  
(4) Drag the [MP830 On-screen Manual] on your desktop into the trash.  
Transporting Machine  
When relocating the machine or storing the machine for a long period of time, pack the machine  
using the original packing materials. If you do not have the original packing materials, pack the  
machine carefully using protective material and place inside a sturdy box.  
Caution  
Do not transport or store the machine on a slant, vertically or upside-down, as the ink may leak from  
the machine and cause damage to it.  
Important  
z Make sure to lock the Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) by sliding the Scanner Lock Switch to the  
Lock position  
.
z Pack the machine with the Print Head and ink tanks left installed.  
Note  
Before shipping the machine by special delivery or post, clearly label the box as “FRAGILE” or  
“HANDLE WITH CARE.”  
Appendix  
200  
Chapter 12  
Specifications  
General Specifications  
9600 * x 2400 dpi. max.  
Printing resolution  
* Ink droplets can be placed with a pitch of 1/9600 inch at minimum.  
Black printing (text pattern)  
Max Speed (Custom Setting 5): 30 ppm  
Standard: 15.0 ppm  
Print speed *  
*Based on Canon standard  
pattern.  
Color printing  
Print speed may vary  
depending on system  
configuration, software,  
document complexity, print  
mode and page coverage.  
Max Speed (Custom Setting 5): 24 ppm  
Standard: 11.7 ppm  
203.2 mm max. (8.0 inches)  
Print width  
(for Borderless Printing: 215.9 mm / 8.5 inches)  
Canon extended mode  
Resident print control  
mode  
42 KB  
Receive buffer  
Interface  
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed / Direct Print Port  
* All operations are not guaranteed for computers standard-equipped with a  
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface.  
* Since the USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface is fully upwardly compatible with USB  
Full-Speed (USB 1.1), it can be used at USB Full-Speed (USB 1.1).  
Direct Print Port  
Approx. 35.0 dB (A) (when printing in the highest print quality mode on Photo  
Paper Pro)  
Acoustic noise level  
Temperature: 5 to 35°C (41 to 95°F)  
Operating environment  
Humidity: 10 to 90%RH (no condensation)  
Temperature: 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)  
Storage environment  
Humidity: 5 to 95% RH (no condensation)  
AC 120-240 V, 50/60 Hz  
Power supply  
Printing (Copy): Approx. 25 W  
Standby (minimum): Approx. 4 W  
OFF: Approx. 1.0 W  
Power consumption  
500 (W) x 487 (D) x 292 (H) mm  
Dimensions  
19.7 (W) x 19.2 (D) x 11.5 (H) inches  
(with the Paper Support,  
Paper Output Tray, and  
Document Tray retracted)  
14.7 kg (32.4 lb.)  
Weight  
Black (PGI-5BK): 512 nozzles  
Print Head  
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black (CLI-8BK): 512 x 6 nozzles  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
201  
General Specifications  
* Max. 35 pages of A4- or Letter-sized sheets (20 lb. or 75 g/m2 paper), up to  
5 mm in height  
ADF capacity  
* Max. 30 pages of Legal-sized sheets (20 lb. or 75 g/m2 paper), up to 4 mm in  
height  
* 1 sheet for sizes other than these  
Copy Specifications  
Black & white: <Fast> mode approx. 29 cpm  
Color: <Fast> mode approx. 24 cpm  
Copy speed  
*Based on Canon standard  
pattern.  
Copy speed may vary  
depending on document  
complexity, copy mode,  
page coverage and the  
number of copies.  
Maximum 99 copies  
9 levels  
No. of copies  
Density adjustment  
Zoom  
25% to 400%  
Fax Specifications  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)  
Applicable line  
Compatibility  
G3 / Super G3 (Mono & Color fax)  
MH, MR, MMR, JPEG  
Fax modem  
Data compressing system  
Modem type  
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/  
4800/2400 bps  
Modem speed  
Automatic fallback  
Black & white: Approx. 3 seconds/page at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-MMR, transmitting  
from memory  
Transmission speed  
(Based on ITU-T No.1 chart for US specifications and Canon FAX Standard  
chart No.1 for others, both in standard mode or Canon FAX Standard chart  
No1, standard mode.)  
Color: Approx. 1 minute 20 seconds/page at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JPEG,  
transmitting from memory  
(Based on Canon COLOR FAX TEST SHEET.)  
Halftones: 256 levels of gray  
Density adjustment: 3 levels  
Scanning image  
processing  
Transmission/reception: 250 pages  
Memory  
(Based on ITU-T No.1 chart for US specifications and Canon FAX Standard  
chart No.1 for others, both in standard mode.)  
Appendix  
202  
Chapter 12  
Fax Specifications  
Black & white <Standard>: 203 pels/in. x 98 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/  
mm)  
Fax resolution  
Black & white <Fine>, <Photo>: 203 pels/in. x 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 7.70  
lines/mm)  
Color: 200 x 200 dpi  
Automatic dialing  
Dialing  
One-touch speed dialing (8 destinations)  
Coded speed dialing (100 destinations)  
Group dialing (max. 107 destinations)  
Regular dialing (with Numeric buttons)  
Automatic redialing  
Manual redialing (with [Redial/Pause])  
Sequential broadcasting (max. 109 destinations)  
Automatic reception  
Other functions  
Automatic fax/telephone switchover  
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection)  
Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)  
Non-ring reception  
ECM deactivation  
Activity report (after every 20 transactions)  
Non-delivery report  
TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)  
Telephone Specifications  
Telephone/answering machine (CNG detecting signal)/data modem  
Connection  
Paper size  
Camera Direct Print (PictBridge)  
Default (Selections based on the machine setting)  
10 x 15 cm/4" x 6" (Photo Paper Plus Glossy, Photo Paper Pro, Photo Paper  
Plus Semi-gloss, Glossy Photo Paper, Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use",  
Photo Stickers*1  
)
13 x 18 cm/5" x 7" (Photo Paper Plus Glossy)*2  
A4/8.5" x 11" (Photo Paper Plus Glossy A4/Letter, Photo Paper Pro A4/Letter,  
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss A4/Letter, Glossy Photo Paper A4/Letter, Glossy  
Photo Paper "Everyday Use" A4, Plain Paper A4/Letter)  
5.4 x 8.6 cm/Credit Card (Glossy Photo Paper Card Size)  
*1 Canon-brand sticker. Printing on this paper is available only when the  
Layout function on your camera has a 16-up option.  
See “Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
*2 If using a Canon PictBridge-compatible camera, you can select it.  
Default (Selections based on the machine setting), Photo (Photo Paper Plus  
Glossy, Glossy Photo Paper), Fast Photo (Photo Paper Pro), Plain Paper (Only  
A4/Letter)  
Paper type  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
203  
Camera Direct Print (PictBridge)  
Default (Selections based on the machine setting), Borderless, Bordered, N-up  
(2, 4, 9, 16*1), 35-up*2  
Layout  
*1 Layout compatible with Canon-brand sticker above. See “Recommended  
Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
*2 Selected photos are printed in 35 mm film style layout (contact printing  
layout).  
This print setting is only available with certain Canon PictBridge-compliant  
devices.  
You can print shooting Info (Exif Data) on photos in list format, or in the  
margins of specified photos.  
Select Layout, then select the item displayed with the [i] icon.  
(Note that this print setting cannot be used for some models.)  
See “Recommended Paper and Requirements” on page 22.  
Default (Off: No trimming), On (follow camera’s setting), Off  
Trimming  
Default (Selections based on the machine setting), On, Off, “VIVID”*, “NR”  
(Noise Reduction)*, “VIVID+NR”*, “Face”*  
Image optimize  
* If using a Canon PictBridge-compatible camera, you can select it.  
Default (Off: No printing), Date, File No., Both, Off  
Print date & file no.  
Compatible paper  
Camera Direct Print (Canon Bubble Jet Direct)  
Card #1 (Photo Paper Pro 4" x 6"/101.6 x 152.4 mm)  
Card #2 (Photo Paper Plus Glossy, Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss, Glossy  
Photo Paper, or Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" 4" x 6" / 101.6 x 152.4  
mm)  
Card #3 (Photo Paper Plus Glossy 5" x 7" / 127.0 x 177.8 mm)  
LTR (Photo Paper Pro, Photo Paper Plus Glossy, Photo Paper Plus Semi-  
gloss, or Glossy Photo Paper Letter size)  
A4 (Photo Paper Pro, Photo Paper Plus Glossy, Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss,  
Glossy Photo Paper, or Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" A4 size)  
Standard: Borderless / with border, Index Print: 6-80 images (depending on the  
size of print media)  
Layout print  
ExifPrint  
Effect  
Ver. 1.00 compatible (Index print, number of copies, select images, print  
special characters (date))  
DPOF functions  
Scan Specifications (Platen Glass)  
TWAIN / WIA (Windows XP)  
Compatibility  
A4/Letter, 8.5" x 11.7" / 216 x 297 mm  
Maximum document size  
Scanning resolution  
Optical resolution 2400 dpi x 4800 dpi  
Interpolated resolution 19200 dpi x 19200 dpi  
Halftones: 256 levels of gray  
Color: 16,777,216 colors  
Scanning image  
processing  
Appendix  
204  
Chapter 12  
*1  
Minimum System Requirements  
*2  
Interface  
Operating System  
Processor  
RAM  
Hard Disk  
Space  
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Windows XP SP1, SP2  
Windows 2000 Professional SP4  
PentiumIII*3  
(Celeron 566  
MHz)  
128 MB  
450 MB  
USB  
Windows XP SP1, SP2  
PentiumII 300  
MHz*3  
128 MB  
450 MB  
Windows 2000 Professional SP2, SP3,  
SP4  
Windows Millennium Edition  
Windows 98*4, 98 Second Edition  
Interface  
Operating System  
Processor  
RAM  
Hard Disk  
Space  
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Mac OS X v.10.4  
PowerPC G4/  
G5  
256 MB  
500 MB  
500 MB  
500 MB  
500 MB  
Mac OS X v.10.2.7 - v.10.3  
PowerPC G4/  
G5  
128 MB  
256 MB  
128 MB  
USB  
Mac OS X v.10.4  
PowerPC G3/  
G4/G5  
Mac OS X v.10.2.4 - v.10.3  
PowerPC G3/  
G4/G5  
*1 For updated compatibility, visit our website.  
*2 Operation can only be guaranteed on a PC with built-in USB or USB 2.0 Hi-Speed port and  
pre-installed Windows XP, 2000, Me or 98.  
*3 Including compatible processors.  
*4 ScanSoft OmniPage SE (OCR software) does not support Windows 98 first edition.  
z CD-ROM drive  
z Display : SVGA 65,000 colors  
Additional Systems Requirements for On-screen Manuals  
®
z Browser: Windows HTML Help Viewer  
z Browser: Help Viewer  
®
* Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later must be  
installed.  
* The on-screen manual may not be displayed  
properly depending on your operating system. We  
recommend that you keep your system up to date.  
The on-screen manual may not be displayed  
properly depending on your operating system or  
Internet Explorer version. We recommend that you  
keep your system up to date with Windows Update.  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
205  
Users in the U.S.A.  
Pre-Installation Requirements for MP830  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See the Appendix for the machine’s  
specific dimensions and weight.  
B. Order Information  
1. Only a single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.  
2. Order an RJ11-C modular wall jack (USOC code), which should be installed by the telephone  
company. If the RJ11-C modular wall jack is not present, telephone/fax operation is not  
possible.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The  
line should be a regular voice grade line or the equivalent one. Use one line per machine.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
-or-  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas  
Note  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, such as the 2500 (touch-tone) or  
500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) unit  
without “Call Waiting” can be used with the machine. Button telephone systems are not  
recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and  
special codes, which may cause a fax error.  
C. Power Requirements  
This machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, two-prong grounded outlet only. Do  
not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause  
“electrical noise.” Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this sort  
generate electrical noise which often interferes with communications equipment and the sending  
or receiving of documents.  
Connection of the Equipment  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.  
On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product  
identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the  
telephone company.  
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.  
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming  
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the  
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the  
local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format  
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is  
a REN of 0.3).  
An FCC compliant telephone line cable cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This  
equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a  
compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant. See Installation instructions for details.  
This equipment if it uses a telephone receiver is hearing aid compatible.  
Appendix  
206  
Chapter 12  
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to  
party lines is subjected to state tariffs.  
In Case of Equipment Malfunction  
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in this guide,  
disconnect the equipment from the telephone line cable, turn off the power and disconnect the power  
cord. The telephone line cable should not be reconnected or the main power switch turned ON until  
the problem is completely resolved. Users should contact their local authorized Canon Facsimile  
Service Dealer for the servicing of equipment.  
Rights of the Telephone Company  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily  
disconnect service. The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and  
services that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the  
telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user. However, if advance notice  
is not possible, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, the  
customer will be advised of his/her right to file a compliant with the FCC if he/she believes it is  
necessary.  
Warning  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer  
or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such  
message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first  
page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other  
entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or  
such business, other entity, or individual.  
In order to program this information into your machine, you should complete the procedure to  
register your name, unit's telephone number, time, and date. See “Registering Sender Information”  
on page 83.  
FCC Notice  
PIXMA MP830: K10270  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
207  
Note  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules.  
Warning  
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in this guide.  
If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the  
equipment.  
Mercury Legislation  
LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR  
DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS  
Canon U.S.A. Inc.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
TEL No. (516) 328-5600  
Appendix  
208  
Chapter 12  
CANON U.S.A., INC. LIMITED WARRANTY  
--- (USA Only)  
The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U.S.A., Inc. ("Canon USA") with respect to  
the new or refurbished Canon-brand product ("Product") packaged with this limited warranty, when  
purchased and used in the United States only.  
The Product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and  
service (a) for a period of one (1) year from the date of original purchase when delivered to you in  
new condition in its original container or (b) for 90 days from the date of original purchase for  
refurbished Products. Defective parts or a defective Product returned to a Canon USA repair facility  
or a Canon USA Authorized Service Facility ("ASF"), and proven to be defective upon inspection, will  
be repaired, exchanged for new or comparable rebuilt parts, or exchanged for a refurbished Product,  
as determined by the Canon USA repair facility or the ASF. Warranty repair or replacement shall not  
extend the original warranty period of the Product. A dated proof of purchase is required at the time  
of warranty service. A copy of your dated bill of sale will satisfy this requirement. This warranty does  
not cover any accessories, or any consumables, such as paper or ink cartridges, as to which there  
shall be no warranty or replacement.  
This limited warranty shall only apply if the Product is used in conjunction with compatible  
computers, peripheral equipment and software. Canon USA shall have no responsibility for such  
items except for compatible Canon brand peripheral equipment covered by a separate warranty  
("Separate Warranty"). Repairs of such Canon brand peripheral equipment shall be governed by the  
terms of the Separate Warranty. Non-Canon brand equipment and software that may be distributed  
with the Product are sold "as is" and without warranty of any kind by Canon USA, including any  
implied warranty regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, and all such warranties  
are disclaimed. The sole warranty, if any, with respect to such non-Canon brand items is given by the  
manufacturer or producer thereof.  
This limited warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the Product and does not apply  
in the following cases:  
(a) Loss of or damage to the Product due to abuse, neglect, mishandling, improper packaging by  
you, alteration, accident, electrical current fluctuations, improper use, failure to follow operating or  
maintenance instructions in, or environmental conditions prescribed in, Canon USA's user's manual  
or other documentation, or services performed by someone other than a Canon USA repair facility or  
ASF. Without limiting the foregoing, dropping the Product, scratches, and abrasions will be  
presumed to have resulted from misuse, abuse or failure to operate the Product as set forth in the  
user's manual or other documentation for the Product.  
(b) Use of parts or supplies (other than those sold by Canon USA) that cause damage to the Product  
or cause abnormally frequent service calls or service problems.  
(c) If the Product has had its serial number or dating defaced, altered or removed.  
ANY SYSTEM SOFTWARE (WHETHER FACTORY LOADED ON THE PRODUCT OR  
CONTAINED ON THE SOFTWARE DISKETTES OR CDROMS ENCLOSED WITH, OR  
ACCOMPANYING, THE PRODUCT), AND ANY UTILITY SOFTWARE, DISTRIBUTED WITH OR  
FOR THE PRODUCT, IS SOLD "AS IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY BY CANON USA. THE SOLE  
WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO SUCH SOFTWARE IS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE  
MANUFACTURER'S LICENSE AGREEMENT DISTRIBUTED THEREWITH, INCLUDING ANY  
LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS THEREON. PLEASE CONTACT CANON USA IMMEDIATELY  
IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED A COPY OF THE SOFTWARE MANUFACTURER'S LICENSE  
AGREEMENT.  
NO IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, APPLIES TO THE PRODUCT AFTER THE  
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE, AND NO  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
209  
OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY, EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE, GIVEN BY  
ANY PERSON OR ENTITY WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT SHALL BIND CANON USA, OR  
ITS ASF. (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED  
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.) CANON USA  
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, INCONVENIENCE, EXPENSE  
FOR SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICE, STORAGE CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION  
OF DATA, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED  
BY THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL  
THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON USA OR ITS ASF HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND  
AGAINST CANON USA OR ITS ASF BE GREATER IN AMOUNT THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE  
OF THE PRODUCT CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,  
YOU ASSUME ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND YOUR  
PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF THE POSSESSION,  
USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT SOLD BY CANON USA NOT CAUSED  
SOLELY AND DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON USA, OR ITS ASF. (SOME STATES  
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.) THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL  
PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A  
GIFT, AND STATES YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.  
Canon USA offers a range of customer technical support* options:  
z Interactive troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and answers to  
frequently asked questions (www.canontechsupport.com)  
z Toll-free live technical support Monday-Saturday (excluding holidays) at 1-800-828-4040  
z Telephone Device for the Deaf (TDD-1-866-251-3752)  
z Repair or Exchange Service Options:  
In the event service is required for the Product during the limited warranty period, Canon USA offers  
two hardware support options:  
Authorized Service Facility Carry-In / Mail-In Service  
Canon USA's Carry-In/Mail-In Service provides repair or exchange, at Canon USA's option, through  
Canon USA's Authorized Service Facility (ASF) network. The name and telephone number of the  
ASF(s) near you may be obtained from Canon USA's Web site at: www.canontechsupport.com or by  
calling the Canon USA Customer Care Center at 1-800-828-4040, or any time while speaking to a  
technical support person. A Product covered by this limited warranty will be repaired or exchanged,  
as determined by Canon USA, and returned without charge by the ASF.  
InstantExchange Service **  
A Canon Customer Care Center or ASF technician will attempt to diagnose the nature of the problem  
and, if possible, correct it over the telephone. If the problem cannot be corrected over the telephone,  
and you elect the InstantExchange option, a reference number will be issued to you. You will be  
asked for the Product serial number and other information pertaining to your defective Product and  
for a ship-to location for the replacement Product (must include street address).  
The Canon USA repair facility will ship out the replacement Product, via 2nd day Air freight service,  
prepaid by Canon USA. After receipt of the replacement Product (with instructions and a prepaid  
waybill), follow the enclosed instructions on how to ship the defective Product to the Canon USA  
repair facility. The defective Product must be returned in the shipping carton in which the  
replacement Product was packed and include the reference number, A COPY OF YOUR DATED  
PROOF OF PURCHASE (BILL OF SALE), and a complete explanation of the problem. DO NOT  
INCLUDE ANY OTHER ITEMS WITH THE DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IN THE RETURN SHIPPING  
CARTON, AND BE SURE TO RETAIN YOUR PRINTHEAD AND INK CARTRIDGE(S) AND  
TANK(S).  
Appendix  
210  
Chapter 12  
InstantExchange Service expedites, usually by the second business day, the exchange of a  
defective Product with a replacement Product, which will normally be shipped the same day if your  
request for this service is by 3 p.m. E.T. Monday through Friday, except holidays (three (3) business  
day InstantExchange Service for Alaska and Hawaii). Canon USA does not guarantee expedited  
shipping service in the event of the occurrence of factors beyond its reasonable control. The  
replacement Product you receive may be a refurbished or reconditioned unit and will be covered for  
the balance of the period remaining on your original limited warranty. NOTE THAT BY USING THIS  
SERVICE YOU WILL KEEP THE REPLACEMENT PRODUCT THAT IS SENT TO YOU. CANON  
USA WILL RETAIN THE DEFECTIVE PRODUCT THAT YOU ORIGINALLY PURCHASED, WHICH  
SHALL BECOME THE PROPERTY OF CANON USA. InstantExchange warranty program service is  
available only during the express limited-warranty period for your Product and only in the continental  
United States, Alaska and Hawaii during such period.  
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary  
from state to state.  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
** InstantExchange warranty service is subject to the availability of refurbished or new replacement  
units.  
Canon U.S.A., Inc.  
One Canon Plaza  
Lake Success, NY 11042  
USA  
Canon is a registered trademark of Canon Inc.  
©2006 Canon U.S.A., Inc. Canon is a registered trademark of Canon Inc. in the United States and  
may also be a registered trademark in other countries.  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
211  
Users in Canada  
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile  
Equipment  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See the Appendix for the machine’s  
specific dimensions and weight.  
B. Order Information  
1. Provide only a single line touch-tone or rotary telephone set terminated with a standard 6-pin  
modular telephone plug. (Touch-tone is recommended if available in your area.)  
2. Order a CA11A modular wall jack, which should be installed by the telephone company. If the  
CA11A modular wall jack is not present, installation cannot occur.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The  
line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per machine.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
-or-  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas  
Note  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, such as the 2500 (touch-tone) or  
500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) unit  
without “Call Waiting” can be used with your facsimile unit. Button telephone systems are not  
recommended because they send non-standard signals to individual telephones for ringing and  
special codes, which may cause a fax error.  
C. Power Requirements  
The power outlet should be a two-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be  
independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners or any electric equipment that is  
thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 120 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular  
jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.  
Notice  
This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada terminal Specifications.  
Avis  
Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Industrie Canada.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permitted to be connected to the  
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an  
acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a  
single-line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly  
(telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to  
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any  
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices  
does not exceed five.  
Even if the dual-line option is installed, the REN is applicable to each port.  
Avis  
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui  
peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut  
Appendix  
212  
Chapter 12  
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme  
d'indices d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility  
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or  
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to  
disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power  
utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together.  
This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Caution  
z Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the  
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
z This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing  
Equipment Regulations.  
z Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le  
matériel brouilleur du Canada.  
Customer Technical Supports  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support* options:  
z For interactive troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and answers  
to frequently asked questions (www.canon.ca)  
z Free live technical support Mon - Fri 9am-8pm EST (excluding holidays) for products still under  
warranty (1-800-OK-CANON)  
z The location of the authorized service facility nearest you (1-800-OK-CANON) If the problem  
cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are  
available at the time of your call to the Free live technical support number above or via the website  
at www.canon.ca  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
CANON CANADA INC.  
1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)  
http://www.canon.ca  
Appendix  
Chapter 12  
213  
Users in New Zealand  
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has  
accepted that the item complies with the minimum conditions for connection to its network. It  
indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above  
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of  
Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is  
compatible with all of Telecom's network services.  
Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the auxiliary telephone port. The auxiliary  
telephone port is not specifically designed for 3-wire-connected equipment. 3-wire-connected  
equipment might not respond to incoming ringing when attached to this port.  
The automatic calling functions of this equipment must not be used to cause a nuisance to other  
Telecom customers.  
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to or from a telephone  
connected to the same line.  
This device may be subject to ringing or bell tinkle when certain other devices are connected to the  
same line. If this occurs, the problem should not be referred to the Telecom Faults Service.  
Appendix  
214  
Chapter 12  
Index  
collation 51  
fade-restored copy 52  
fit-to-page 43  
Numerics  
button 17  
image repeat 50  
intensity 42  
A
Access Lamp 14  
preset ratio 43  
reducing or enlarging 43  
sticker copy 49  
two-sided copy 44  
zoom 43  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) 12  
Alarm Lamp 16  
Appendix 197  
Auto Sheet Feeder 12  
Auto Sheet Feeder Lamp 17  
Cover Guide 12  
B
D
Back button 17  
Before Printing 12  
Black button 17  
Device settings 133  
Direct Print Port 13  
Document Cover 12  
Document Guides 12  
Document Output Slot 12  
Document Tray 12  
Duplexing Transport Unit 15  
C
Card Slot 14  
Card Slot Cover 12  
Cassette 13  
Cassette Lamp 17  
Changing the Machine Settings 134  
adjust contrast 141  
country select 141  
fax settings 136  
E
Enlarge/Reduce button 17  
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols 102  
External Device Jack 15  
language selection 141  
load settings 141  
F
FAX button 16  
power save setting 141  
print settings 135  
read/write attribute 140  
reset setting 141  
FAX Quality button 17  
Fax Settings 136  
date and time 84  
sender information 85  
summer time 99  
telephone line type 81  
Feed Switch button 17  
Feeder Cover 12  
save settings 141  
slide show setting 141  
volume control 140  
Changing the Print Settings 37  
copy mode 39  
memory card mode 40  
Cleaning  
H
Hook button 17  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) 155  
bottom plate 157  
I
platen glass and document cover 155  
roller 156  
In Use/Memory Lamp 16  
Ink Tank Lamp 14  
Inner Cover 14  
CLI-8BK Black 142  
CLI-8C Cyan 142  
CLI-8M Magenta 142  
CLI-8Y Yellow 142  
Coded Dial button 17  
Color button 17  
L
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 16  
Loading Documents 20  
Loading Paper  
Components 12  
COPY button 16  
auto sheet feeder 27  
cassette 32  
recommended paper and requirements 22  
Copying 42  
2-on-1 copy 47  
4-on-1 copy 48  
auto intensity 46  
borderless copy 50  
Index  
215  
Printing from Your Computer 123  
Macintosh 126  
Windows 123  
M
Maintenance  
cleaning your machine 154  
Memory 113  
checking a document’s details in 116  
deleting a document in 114  
printing a list of documents in 113  
Memory Card 16  
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant  
Device 70  
Canon Bubble Jet Direct 76  
Connecting 70  
PictBridge 73  
inserting 54  
removing 56  
R
Reading from and Writing to a Memory Card 133  
Rear Cover 15  
Receiving Faxes 118  
canceling receiving 122  
memory receiving 122  
paper size and type 119  
receive modes 119  
supported by this machine 53  
MEMORY CARD button 16  
Menu button 16  
N
Nozzle Check Pattern  
examining 150  
printing 149  
Redial/Pause button 17  
Registering Speed Dials  
coded speed dialing 89  
group dialing 93  
Numeric Buttons 16  
O
OK button 17  
ON/OFF button 16  
One-Touch Speed Dial Key 16  
Open Button 13  
Operation Panel 13, 16  
one-touch speed dialing 86  
Replacing Ink Tanks 143  
Reports and Lists 104  
Routine Maintenance 142  
Replacing Ink Tanks 143  
S
P
Paper Guide 12  
Safety Precautions 5  
SCAN button 16  
Paper Output Tray 13  
Paper Support 12  
PGI-5BK Black 142  
Photo Index Sheet button 17  
Platen Glass 13  
Scanner Lock Switch 13  
Scanning Images  
attach to E-mail 131  
one-sided scan from ADF 131  
open with application 131  
save as PDF file 131  
save to PC 131  
Power Connector 15  
Power save setting 141  
Print Head  
scan from platen glass 131  
two-sided scan from ADF 131  
Scanning Unit (Printer Cover) 14  
Search button 17  
adjusting the print head manually 165  
aligning print head automatically 153  
cleaning 151  
deep cleaning 152  
Print Head Holder 14  
Print Head Lock Lever 14  
Printing Area 197  
Sending Faxes 106  
automatic redialing 113  
coded speed dialing 112  
dialing through a switchboard 117  
fax resolution 107  
Printing from a Memory Card 53  
captured info 65  
DPOF print 64  
group dialing 112  
manual redialing 112  
manual sending 109  
memory sending 108  
one-touch speed dialing 112  
scan contrast 107  
layout print 61  
multi-photo print 58  
photo index print 64  
photo index sheet 66  
print all photos 64  
search 59  
sequential broadcasting 110  
switching temporarily to tone dialing 117  
Settings button 16  
single-photo print 56  
sticker print 62  
trimming 60  
Specifications  
Canon Bubble Jet Direct 204  
copy 202  
fax 202  
Index  
216  
general 201  
PictBridge 203  
scan 204  
telephone 203  
Stop/Reset button 16  
System Requirements 205  
T
Telephone Line Jack 15  
Tone button 17  
Trimming button 17  
Troubleshooting 159  
paper jams 174  
Turning the Machine ON and OFF 18  
Two-Sided button 17  
U
USB Connector (for computer) 15  
Index  
217  
The following ink tanks are compatible with this machine.  
For details on ink tank replacement, refer to “Replacing Ink Tanks” in this guide.  
QT5-0241-V03  
XXXXXXXX  
©CANON INC.2006  
PRINTED IN THAILAND  

Admiral AAW 18CM1FHUE User Manual
Bryant Air Conditioner 123A User Manual
Canon Wireless Photo All In One 8331B002 User Manual
Canon Wireless Photo All In One 8333B022 User Manual
Casio CELVIANO AP 31 User Manual
Epson STYLUS OFFICE BX610FW User Manual
Friedrich Air Conditioner SH20L30 A User Manual
Haier Air Conditioner HSU 18CKASR2DB User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Color LaserJet 3000DN User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard Printer 4V User Manual